0% found this document useful (0 votes)

6 views237 pages

NK300CX Integrated CNC System: Manufacturers' Manual

The NK300CX Integrated CNC System Manufacturers' Manual provides comprehensive guidance for users, including installation, wiring, software operation, and maintenance. It is divided into five parts covering precautions, hardware and software details, troubleshooting, and system parameters. The manual is applicable to NK300CX-H and NK300CX-V models and emphasizes safety and proper handling procedures.

Uploaded by

alfred.abounasr

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

6 views237 pages

NK300CX Integrated CNC System: Manufacturers' Manual

Uploaded by

alfred.abounasr

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 237

NK300CX Integrated CNC System

Manufacturers’ Manual
4th Edition

Weihong Electronic Technology Co., Ltd.

The copyright of this manual belongs to Weihong Electronic Technology Co., Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as
Weihong Company). This manual and any image, table, data or other information contained in this manual may
not be reproduced, transferred, or translated without any prior written permission of Weihong Company.

The information contained in this manual is constantly being updated. You can login the official website of
Weihong Company www.en.weihong.com.cn to download the latest PDF edition for free.
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Preface
About This manual

This manual is intended for manufacturers. If you use Weihong CNC system for the first time, it is
suggested to read through this manual. If not, however, you can search for the desired information via
the contents.
With 8 chapters, this manual can be divided into 5 parts, as follows:
1) Part 1: preface, introducing the precautions about transportation and storage, installation, wiring,
debugging, usage and so on. You need to read them first carefully to ensure safe operations.
2) Part 2: illustration of hardware, including chapter 1, 2 and 6. The former two chapters introduce
components of the system, the dimensional sizes as well as pin definition of IO ports of the Lambda
controller. Chapter 6 presents parameter settings of servo drivers of various brands as well as their
wiring diagrams with Lambda controller.
3) Part 3: introduction to software operation, including chapter 3 and chapter 4. Taking three-axis
configuration of integral software and multi-Z axes software as examples respectively, two chapters
illustrate detailed operations of single functionality and its corresponding interfaces, which will be an
intuitional guidance to users and operators in real practice.
4) Part 4: maintenance, referring to chapter 5. In this chapter, possible problems and their
countermeasures are listed, aiming to help users to respond instantly and take effective measures
when possible failure occurs.
5) Part 5: last part of this manual, consisting of chapter 7 and chapter 8, corresponding to table of
parameters of the system as well as the software license agreement.

Applicable Product Model

This manual is applicable to NK300CX-H and NK300CX-V. Refer to the table below for details.

Product Model Remarks

Herein referred to NK300CX as abbreviation, which can be used
together with integral software and multi-Z software. Integral
software takes three-axis configuration, four-axis configuration and
NK300CX integrated CNC
five-axis configuration as a whole. Multi-Z software consists of
system
linkage configuration and alternative configuration.
With no further explanation, the system in this manual refers to
NK300CX integrated CNC system.

Preface「I」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

You can contact us by the following info for technical support and pre-sales / after-sales service:
Company Name: Weihong Electronic Technology Co., Ltd.
Headquarters Address: No.1590, Huhang Rd., Fengxian, Shanghai, PRC 201401
Tel: +86-21-33587550
Fax: +86-21-33587519
Website: http://en.weihong.com.cn

Revision History

You can refer to the following table for the revision records of each edition.

Date Edition Revision

1) Wiring diagrams of Lambda 5S controller removed;
2) Auto tool change of servo tool magazine added, and section 3.20
updated;
2016.07 R4
3) Section 3.5 and 3.6 updated, returning to the machine origin with
absolute encoder function;
4) Other revisions.
1) Contact information updated;
2016.02 R3 2) Wiring diagram of Lambda 5S controller updated;
3) Section 3.14.1 Tool Compensation updated;
Main revision contents are as follows:
1) Add section 0 returning to machine origin with absolute encoder
function;
2) Add section 5.4.6 software failures because of automatic write
2016.01 R2
number identification;
3) Update change tool flowcharts of linear tool magazine and circular
tool magazine in section 0.
4) Other revisions.
2015.12 R1 Released for the first time.

Precautions

Precautions can be divided into caution and warning according to the degree of possible loss or injury in
case of negligence or omission of precautions stipulated in this manual.

CAUTION
: general info, mainly for informing, such as supplementary instructions and
conditions to enable a function. In case of negligence or omission of this kind of precautions, you may

「II」Preface
Specialized Concentrated Focused

not activate a function. Note that in some circumstances, negligence or omission of this kind of
precautions could cause physical injury or machine damage.

WARNING
: warning info requiring special attention. In case of negligence or omission of
this kind of precautions, you may suffer physical injury, or even death, machine damage or other losses.

WARNING

1) Precautions Related to Storage and Transportation

 The products should be transported properly in terms of the weight;

 An excess of specified quantity of stacking products is prohibited;

 Climbing, standing or placing heavy loads on the products is prohibited;

 Dragging or carrying the products via cables or devices connected to them is prohibited;

2) Precautions Related to Installation

 Only when this equipment installed in the qualified electricity cabinet can it be used. The
construction of the cabinet must reach IP54 grade of protection;

 Paste sealing strips on the joint of the cabinet to seal all the cracks;

 Cable entry should be sealed while easy-to-open on the spot;

 A fan or heat exchanger should be adopted for the heat dissipation and air convection of the
cabinet;

 If a fan is adopted, air strainer is a must in air inlet or air outlet;

 Dust or cutting fluids may have access to the CNC device via the tiny cracks and tuyere.
Therefore it is necessary to pay attention to the surroundings and air flow direction of the air
vent to make sure that the outflow gas is towards pollution source;

 100 mm space should be preserved between the back of the CNC device and the cabinet wall
for plugging cable connected with the device and the ventilation & heat dissipation in the
cabinet;

 Space between this device and other equipment should also be preserved according to the
requirements;

 The product should be installed firmly and without vibration. During installing, casting,
knocking, striking, or loading on the product is forbidden;

 To reduce electromagnetic interference, power-supply components used should be above AC

or DC 50V and the space between cable and CNC device should be preserved above 100mm;

Preface「III」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

WARNING
 It will be better if CNC device is installed at a position facilitating debugging and maintenance.

3) Precautions Related to Wiring

 Only qualified people are allowed to participate in the wiring and checking;

 The CNC device should be grounded reliably and grounding resistance should be less than 4
ohm. Neutral line is absolutely not allowed to replace earth wire. Otherwise, it may result in
malfunction of the device due to the interference;

 Wiring should be firm and steady, or mal-operation may occur;

 Voltage values and positive & negative polarity of any connection plug should be in accordance
with specifications set forth in the manual, or it may result in breakdowns such as short circuit
and permanent damage to the device;

 To guard against electric shock or CNC device damage, fingers should keep dry before
plugging or touching switch;

 The connecting wire should not be damaged and squeezed, or the leakage or short circuit may
occur;

 It is prohibited to plug or open the chassis of CNC device when power on.

4) Precautions Related to Running & Debugging

 Parameters setting should be checked before running, since wrong setting may lead to
accidental movements;

 Modification to parameters should be within the allowable range, or such breakdowns as

unsteady running and machine damage will occur.

5) Precautions in Use

 Before power-on, please make sure that the switch is on blackout to avoid occasional start-up;

 Please check the electromagnetic compatibility during electrical design in order to avoid or
reduce electromagnetic interference to the CNC device. A low pass filter should be employed
to reduce electromagnetic interference if there are other electrical devices nearby;

 It is not allowed to frequently power on and power off. It is recommended to power up the
machine again at least one (1) minute later after power failure or blackout.

「IV」Preface
Specialized Concentrated Focused

CAUTION

1) Precautions Related to Product and Manual

 Matters related to restrictions and functions available stipulated in the manuals issued by the
machine manufacturer are prior to those in this manual;

 This manual assumes all the optional functions are available, which you must confirm through
manuals issued by the machine manufacturer;

 Please refer to manuals issued by the machine manufacturer for the instructions of machine
tools;

 Functions, and software interfaces vary with the system and the version of software. Before
using the system, you must confirm the specifications.

2) Precautions When Opening the Package

 Please make sure that the products are what you have ordered;

 Check if the products are damaged in transit;

 Check if the components and accessories are damaged or missing in terms of the detailed list;

 Please contact us promptly if product discrepancy, accessory missing or transit damage

occurs.

Preface「V」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Contents
1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Hardware ................................................................................................................................................ 2

1.1.1 System Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1.1 Host ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1.1.2 Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1.2 Mounting Dimension ............................................................................................................................... 10
1.1.2.1 Mounting Dimension of NK300CX Host ........................................................................................... 10
1.1.2.2 Mounting Dimension of Lambda Controller 5S ............................................................................... 11
1.1.2.3 Mounting Dimension of EX31A ....................................................................................................... 11
1.1.3 Overall Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 12

1.2 Software ................................................................................................................................................13

2 Wiring......................................................................................................................... 16

2.1 Signal Types ...........................................................................................................................................17

2.1.1 Binary Input Signal ................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.2 Relay Output Signal .................................................................................................................................. 17
2.1.3 Differential Output Signal ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.1.4 Analog Output Signal ............................................................................................................................... 18

2.2 Wiring Diagram of Electrical Switch on Operation Panel ........................................................................19

2.3 Pin Definition and Wiring Specification .................................................................................................19

2.3.1 Driver Interface Definition ....................................................................................................................... 19
2.3.2 Handwheel Interface Definition ............................................................................................................... 20
2.3.3 USB Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 21

3 Software Operation ..................................................................................................... 22

3.1 Debugging Steps ....................................................................................................................................26

3.2 I/O Ports Polarity Adjustment ................................................................................................................27

3.3 Adjustment of Axis Direction and Pulse Equivalent ................................................................................30

3.3.1 Axis Direction Adjustment ....................................................................................................................... 30
3.3.2 Pulse Equivalent Adjustment ................................................................................................................... 31
3.3.3 Upper & Lower Limit Setting of Worktable Stroke ................................................................................... 33

「VI」Contents
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.4 Encoder Feedback ..................................................................................................................................34

3.4.1 Encoder Feedback Function ..................................................................................................................... 34
3.4.2 Setting Axis Encoder Direction ................................................................................................................. 34
3.4.3 Encoder Error ........................................................................................................................................... 35
3.4.4 Setting Frequency Division Pulses of PG(X4) ........................................................................................... 35
3.4.5 Encoder Feedback Parameter Specification............................................................................................. 35

3.5 Returning to Machine Origin ..................................................................................................................36

3.5.1 Software Operation.................................................................................................................................. 36
3.5.1.1 The Process of Returning to Machine Origin ................................................................................... 37
3.5.2 Returning to Machine Origin under Three Axes Configuration ................................................................ 37
3.5.3 Personalized Setting of Axes Order in Returning to REF Point ................................................................. 38
3.5.4 Principle of Returning to Machine Origin (without Encoder Feedback) .................................................. 40
3.5.5 Principle of Returning to Machine Origin (with Encoder Feedback)........................................................ 42
3.5.6 Parameter Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 43
3.5.7 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................... 45

3.6 Returning to Machine Origin (with Absolute Encoder Function) ............................................................47

3.6.1 Functional Environment........................................................................................................................... 47
3.6.2 Related Parameter Setting ....................................................................................................................... 48
3.6.2.1 Enable Absolute Encoder Function .................................................................................................. 48
3.6.2.2 Machine Position-related Parameter Setting .................................................................................. 48
3.6.3 Initialization of Absolute Type Encoder ................................................................................................... 49
3.6.3.1 Situations Where Initialization Is A Must ........................................................................................ 49
3.6.3.2 Steps of Initialization ....................................................................................................................... 49
3.6.4 Software Operation.................................................................................................................................. 50
3.6.5 Parameter Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 52

3.7 Preheat and Wear ..................................................................................................................................53

3.8 Spindle Parameter Adjustment ..............................................................................................................56

3.9 Tool Measurement .................................................................................................................................58

3.9.1 Software Interface ................................................................................................................................... 59
3.9.2 Fixed Calibration ...................................................................................................................................... 60
3.9.3 Mobile Calibration ................................................................................................................................... 61
3.9.4 First-time Calibration/Calibration after Tool Changed ............................................................................. 63

3.10 Offset Setting of Workpiece Coordinate System .....................................................................................65

3.10.1 Workpiece Coordinate System ............................................................................................................ 65

Contents「VII」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.10.2 Extended Coordinate System ............................................................................................................... 67

3.10.3 Software Interface ............................................................................................................................... 67

3.11 Centering ...............................................................................................................................................70

3.11.1 Line Centering ...................................................................................................................................... 70
3.11.2 Circle Centering ................................................................................................................................... 71

3.12 Adjustment of Velocity & Acceleration ..................................................................................................72

3.12.1 Feedrate Setting................................................................................................................................... 72
3.12.2 G00 Speed Setting ............................................................................................................................... 73
3.12.3 Jog Speed/ Rapid Jog Speed ................................................................................................................ 73
3.12.4 Parameter Specification ....................................................................................................................... 74

3.13 Simulation & Track .................................................................................................................................79

3.13.1 Simulation ............................................................................................................................................ 79
3.13.2 Motion Track ........................................................................................................................................ 80
3.13.3 Machining Statistics ............................................................................................................................. 81
3.13.4 Parameter Specification ....................................................................................................................... 82

3.14 Compensation .......................................................................................................................................83

3.14.1 Tool Compensation .............................................................................................................................. 83
3.14.1.1 Tool Radius Compensation (G40~G42) ............................................................................................ 84
3.14.1.2 Tool Compensation Type ................................................................................................................. 85
3.14.1.3 Tool Compensation Direction .......................................................................................................... 86
3.14.2 Part Compensation .............................................................................................................................. 87
3.14.3 Screw Error Compensation .................................................................................................................. 88
3.14.3.1 Causes of Screw Error and Compensation Method ......................................................................... 88
3.14.3.2 Screw Error Compensation Operation ............................................................................................. 90
3.14.3.3 Software Interface and Operation ................................................................................................... 92
3.14.4 Across Quadrant Error Compensation ................................................................................................. 95

3.15 Log and Diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................96

3.15.1 Alarm ................................................................................................................................................... 96
3.15.2 Log ....................................................................................................................................................... 96
3.15.3 Port ...................................................................................................................................................... 97
3.15.4 Diagnosis.............................................................................................................................................. 98

3.16 Program File Management ....................................................................................................................99

「VIII」Contents
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.16.3 History ............................................................................................................................................... 106

3.16.4 Parameter Specification ..................................................................................................................... 107

3.17 Handwheel Operation..........................................................................................................................110

3.17.1 Handwheel Mode .............................................................................................................................. 110
3.17.2 Handwheel Guide .............................................................................................................................. 112

3.18 System Management ...........................................................................................................................113

3.18.1 System Info ........................................................................................................................................ 113
3.18.2 Configuration and Language Setting.................................................................................................. 113
3.18.3 IP Setting ............................................................................................................................................ 115
3.18.4 Registration ........................................................................................................................................ 116
3.18.4.1 “NcStudio Generator” ................................................................................................................... 116
3.18.4.2 Registration with Registration Code .............................................................................................. 121

3.19 Auxiliary Function ................................................................................................................................123

3.19.1 Single Block Execution ....................................................................................................................... 123
3.19.2 Back to Workpiece Origin .................................................................................................................. 124
3.19.3 Jiggle .................................................................................................................................................. 124
3.19.4 Advanced Start................................................................................................................................... 125
3.19.5 Mirror and Rotation ........................................................................................................................... 126
3.19.6 Breakpoint Resume............................................................................................................................ 128
3.19.7 Workpiece Length Sensing................................................................................................................. 128
3.19.8 Restore Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 128
3.19.9 Manual Data Input (MDI)................................................................................................................... 129

3.20 Tool Magazine ......................................................................................................................................130

3.20.1 Auto Tool Change for A Linear Tool Magazine ................................................................................... 130
3.20.2 Auto Tool Change for A Circular Tool Magazine ................................................................................. 132
3.20.3 Auto Tool Change for A Servo Tool Magazine .................................................................................... 134
3.20.4 Prompt for Tool Change ..................................................................................................................... 135
3.20.5 Parameter Specifications ................................................................................................................... 136

4 Introduction to Multi-Z Axes Software ....................................................................... 139

4.1 Configuration Selection .......................................................................................................................140

4.1.1 “Union” Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 140
4.1.2 “Turn” Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 142

4.2 Tool Measurement ...............................................................................................................................142

Contents「IX」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

4.3 Related Parameters..............................................................................................................................143

5 Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 145

5.1 Operation System Maintenance ...........................................................................................................146

5.1.1 Preparation ............................................................................................................................................ 146
5.1.2 Creating OS Startup Disk ........................................................................................................................ 146
5.1.3 OS Restoration ....................................................................................................................................... 147
5.1.4 Backup OS to USB disk ........................................................................................................................... 148
5.1.5 Backup and Restoration of the Integrated System ................................................................................. 149

5.2 NcStudio System Maintenance ............................................................................................................152

5.2.1 Package and Update .............................................................................................................................. 152
5.2.2 Software Installation .............................................................................................................................. 154

5.3 Warning Information ...........................................................................................................................156

5.4 Common Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................159

5.4.1 What should you do if the spindle does not rotate? ............................................................................. 159
5.4.2 What should you do if an axis does not move? ..................................................................................... 159
5.4.3 What should you do if servo motor brake in Z-axis does not work?...................................................... 160
5.4.4 What should you do if homing is abnormal? ......................................................................................... 160
5.4.5 What should you do if a machine tool moves upward after arriving at the position of tool presetter
during tool presetting? ............................................................................................................................................... 161
5.4.6 What should you do if software failed because of automatic write number identification? ................ 161
5.4.6.1 Write file tag not exist ................................................................................................................... 162
5.4.6.2 Write type not matched ................................................................................................................ 162
5.4.6.3 Active configuration not matched ................................................................................................. 164
5.4.6.4 Active axes number and configuration not matched ..................................................................... 164

6 Driver........................................................................................................................ 165

6.1 Driver Parameters ................................................................................................................................ 167

6.1.1 Parameters Setting of WISE Servo Driver............................................................................................... 167
6.1.2 Parameters Setting of YASKAWA Σ–Ⅱ Servo Driver ........................................................................ 168
6.1.3 Parameter Setting of YASKAWA Σ-Ⅴ Servo Driver ................................................................................ 170
6.1.4 Parameter Setting of PANASONIC MINAS A4 Servo Driver .................................................................... 171
6.1.5 Parameter Setting of PANASONIC MINAS A5 Servo Driver .................................................................... 172
6.1.6 Parameter Setting of MITSUBISHI MR-JE Servo Driver .......................................................................... 174
6.1.7 Parameter Setting of MITSUBISHI MR-E Servo Driver ............................................................................ 175

「X」Contents
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.1.8 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-A Servo Driver ................................................................................. 176

6.1.9 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-A2 Servo Driver ............................................................................... 177
6.1.10 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-B Servo Driver ............................................................................. 179
6.1.11 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-B2 Servo Driver ........................................................................... 181
6.1.12 Parameter Setting of SANYO PY Servo Driver .................................................................................... 182
6.1.13 Parameter Setting of SANYO R Servo Driver ...................................................................................... 185
6.1.14 Parameter Setting of SANYO Q Servo Driver ..................................................................................... 185
6.1.15 Parameter Setting of KT270 Servo Driver .......................................................................................... 186
6.1.16 Parameter Setting of FUJI FALDIC-β Servo Driver .............................................................................. 188
6.1.17 Parameter Setting of STONE GS Servo Driver .................................................................................... 189
6.1.18 Parameter Setting of TECO TSDA Servo Driver .................................................................................. 190

6.2 Wiring Diagram of Driver and Terminal Board .....................................................................................191

6.2.1 Wiring Diagram of WISE Servo Driver .................................................................................................... 192
6.2.2 Wiring Diagram of YASKAWA AC Servo Driver ....................................................................................... 193
6.2.3 Wiring Diagram of PANASONIC AC Servo Driver .................................................................................... 194
6.2.4 Wiring Diagram of MITSUBISHI MR-JE Servo Driver .............................................................................. 195
6.2.5 Wiring Diagram of MITSUBISHI MR-E Servo Driver ............................................................................... 196
6.2.6 Wiring Diagram of DELTA Servo Driver .................................................................................................. 196
6.2.7 Wiring Diagram of FUJI Servo Driver ..................................................................................................... 199
6.2.8 Wiring Diagram of HITACHI Servo Driver ............................................................................................... 199
6.2.9 Wiring Diagram of SANYO PY Servo Driver ............................................................................................ 200
6.2.10 Wiring Diagram of SANYO R Servo Driver .......................................................................................... 201
6.2.11 Wiring Diagram of KT270 Servo Driver .............................................................................................. 201
6.2.12 Wiring Diagram of STONE GS Servo Driver ........................................................................................ 202
6.2.13 Wiring Diagram of TECO TSDA Servo Driver ...................................................................................... 203
6.2.14 Wiring Diagram of TECO ESDA Servo Driver ...................................................................................... 204

7 Table of Parameters................................................................................................... 205

8 Software License Agreement ..................................................................................... 222

Contents「XI」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

「XII」Contents
Specialized Concentrated Focused

1 Overview
1.1 Hardware ................................................................................................................................................ 2
1.1.1 System Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.1.1 Host ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1.1.2 Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1.2 Mounting Dimension ............................................................................................................................... 10
1.1.2.1 Mounting Dimension of NK300CX Host ........................................................................................... 10
1.1.2.2 Mounting Dimension of Lambda Controller 5S ............................................................................... 11
1.1.2.3 Mounting Dimension of EX31A ....................................................................................................... 11
1.1.3 Overall Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 12

1.2 Software ................................................................................................................................................13

Overview「1」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

1.1 Hardware

1.1.1 System Configuration

According to model of the operational panel, NK300CX is divided into NK300CX-H and NK300CX-V,
whose pictures are shown as Fig. 1-1 and Fig. 1-2 respectively.

Fig. 1-1 A picture of NK300CX-H

NK300CX-H integrated CNC system consists of the following components:

 One NK300CX host
 One WH106C operation panel
 One WH201C keypad panel
 One Lambda 5S series controller
 Two DB9M/F cable (40cm)
 One DB9M/F cable (length optional)
 One DB9M/F cable (40cm, optional)
 One extended terminal board EX31A1 (optional)
 Handwheel NK-MPG-06 (optional)

「2」Overview
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 1-2 A picture of NK300CX-V

NK300CX-V integrated CNC system consists of the following components:

 One NK300CX host
 One WH108C operation panel
 One Lambda 5S series controller
 One DB9M/F cable (40cm)
 One DB9M/F cable (length optional)
 One DB9M/F cable (40cm, optional)
 One extended terminal board EX31A1 (optional)
 Handwheel NK-MPG-06 (optional)

CAUTION
1) Apart from difference of names and models of specific components, NK300CX-H shares the same with
NK300CX-V in aspects of functionalities, size, etc. you can refer to above contents for details of each
component.
2) Note that each components of NK300BX is not compatible with that of NK300CX, which is history product
of NK300CX.

1.1.1.1 Host
Front view of the host is shown as Fig. 1-3.

Overview「3」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Display
Area

Function Selection Keys

Interface
USB
Manipulation
Keys

Fig. 1-3 Front view of NK300CX host

1. Display area. It is human-machine interface, or user‘s interface, which is user-friendly and ease of
use.
2. USB interface. It is used for USB removable flash disk connection, protected by a cover.
3. Function selection keys. There are altogether 6 functional areas, including machining, advanced,
program, system, parameter and diagnosis. You can access the functional area by pressing the key
here directly.
4. Manipulation keys. Including F1~F8, which are used to activate the functions indicated by the soft
keys.
See Fig. 1-4 for rear view of the host.

To connect DB9M/F cable VGA interface USB To connect power

Interface supply
To connect Lambda5S controller LAN
interface

Fig. 1-4 Rear view of the host

「4」Overview
Specialized Concentrated Focused

1. DB9M/F cable interface. For NK300CX-H, the interface is used to connect with keypad panel; while
for NK300CX-V, it is used to connect with operation panel.
2. Controller interface. It is used to connect with Lambda 5S controller.
3. VGA interface. It is used to connect with the monitor or display.
4. LAN interface. It is used to connect with network, with transmission rate of 100Mbps.
5. USB interface. Two USB interfaces, which are used to connect with removable flash disk.
6. Power interface. It is used to connect with 220V power supply.

1.1.1.2 Operation Panel

WH106C operation panel and WH201C keypad panel are adopted for NK300CX-H, while WH108C
operation panel is adopted for NK300CX-V.

 Illustration of WH106C Operation Panel

33 55

11
88
99

22 44 66 77 10
10
Fig. 1-5 Front view of WH106C operation panel

See below for detailed information of each part.

1. USB interface (with a protection cap), used for connection with removable flash disk.
2. Emergency stop switch. Anytime there is possible danger, operator can press E-stop switch to stop
the machine to protect safety of both human and machine, and when danger is cleared, turn the
switch in clockwise direction to remove the alarm.
3. Spindle override knob, which is used for spindle speed override adjustment. Refer to section 3.8 for
details.
4. Mode selection knob, which is used for mode selection, as shown in Fig. 1-6.

Handle ×1 ×10 ×100

(MPG) ×1000
Jog ×UD
Auto
REF. point

Fig. 1-6 Mode selection knob

Overview「5」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

5. Feed override knob, which is used for feedrate override adjustment. Refer to section 3.12.1 for
details.
6. Axis direction keys, used for manual control of each axis movement in jog mode or jiggle mode. See
Fig. 1-7 for concrete keys. How to use [Rapid] key? In manual mode, when any axis direction key
and [Rapid] key are together pressed, the axis moves at manual high speed, or called rapid jog
speed; when any axis direction key is pressed alone, the axis moves at manual speed, or called jog
speed.

Z+ Y+ 4+

X- X+
Rapid

Z- Y- 4-

Fig. 1-7 Axis direction keys

7. Motion control keys. In auto mode, you can press [Cycle Start], [Pause] and [Cycle Stop] keys to
conduct corresponding functions. The moment power interruption or emergency stop occurs, you
can press [Resume] key to resume machining from the interrupted point to save time on condition
that the workpiece origin is accurate for sure.
8. Extension keys area. [K1], [K2], [K3] and [K4] keys are included, used for user-defined functions.
9. Auxiliary function keys area. See below for details.

SPINDLE

CW
CW Stop
Stop CCW
CCW

Spindle
Spindle control
control Illumination
Illumination
Coolant
Coolant
ATCCW
ATCCW ATC
ATC CCW
CCW Light
Light Coolant
Coolant

SIM
SIM
Lube
Lube
Simulate
Simulate Single
Singleblock
block Handle
Handle Chip
Chip CW
CW Chip
Chip CCW
CCW Air
Air Lube
Lube

Blow
Blow
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Single
Single block
block Chip
Chip removal
removal CW/CCW
CW/CCW
Reset
Reset Magazine
Magazine CW/CCW
CW/CCW
Simulation
Simulation HW
HW guide
guide

Fig. 1-8 Auxiliary function keys

10. Power ON/OFF switch, used to turn ON/OFF the power supply.

「6」Overview
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Here is rear view of WH106C operation panel. See below for detailed information of each part.

1 2 3
Fig. 1-9 Rear view of WH106C operation panel

1. Panel electrical switch. It is used to control the power supply of operation panel. Refer to section 2.2
for details.
2. DB9M/F cable interface. Connect WH106C operation panel with keypad panel via DB9M/F cable
(40cm).
3. MPG interface. It is used for connection with MPG (also called handwheel or handle).

 Illustration of WH201C Keypad Panel

1 2

3
4

Fig. 1-10 Front view of WH201C keypad panel

1. Alphabet area, where you can enter 26 alphabetic letters. Together pressing [Shift] key and
alphabet key or double pressing the alphabet key can input the letter on the upper-left of the key.
2. Numeric keys area, where you can enter number or sign. Together pressing [Shift] key and number
key can input the sign on the upper-left of the key.
3. Direction keys area, also called arrow keys, including Up (↑), Down (↓), Left (←) and Right (→)
keys. Besides, you can locate the cursor to the beginning or end by pressing [Home] or [End] key
directly.
4. System operation keys area. There are 7 keys, including [PgUp], [PgDn], [Enter], [Del], [Select],
[Caps], and [Esc], used for jumping to the previous page, jumping to the next page, confirmation,
delete, selection, input of letters in upper case and exit respectively.

Overview「7」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Next is a picture of rear view of WH201C keypad panel.

1 2

Fig. 1-11 Rear view of WH201C keypad panel

1. DB9M/F cable interface (pin), used to connect with WH106C operation panel.
2. DB9M/F cable interface (hole), used to connect with the host.

 Illustration of WH108C Operation Panel

System
System operation
operation keys
keys
(including
(including direction
direction keys)
keys)

Alphabet
Alphabet keys
keys
Number
Number keys
keys area
area

Extension
Extension keys
keys area
area
Auxiliary
Auxiliary function
function keys
keys

E-stop
E-stop switch
switch Spindle
Spindle override
override knob
knob
Mode
Mode selection
selection area
area Axis
Axis direction
direction keys
keys
Feed
Feed override
override knob
knob

Power
Power ON/OFF
ON/OFF switch
switch Motion
Motion control
control keys
keys

Fig. 1-12 Front view of WH108C operation panel

Most keys on WH108C and WH106C are the same, except for their layout as well as minor difference of
auxiliary function keys and mode selection keys. For example, mode selection keys on WH108C
correspond to the mode selection knob on WH106C operation panel.
Refer to the following pictures for concrete keys of auxiliary functional area and mode selection area.

「8」Overview
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Tool magazine Magazine Spindle

Lubrication
rotate CW/CCW eject out unclamp Blow Illumination Coolant Rapid

ATC CW ATC CCW Eject Unclamp Air Light Coolant Oil Rapid

Reset SIM

Reset Simulate Single block Handle REF. point Jog Auto Handle Step CW Stop CCW

Reset Simulate Single HW REF. Jog Auto HW Stepping Spindle Spindle Spindle
block guide point CW stop CCW

Fig. 1-13 Auxiliary function keys and mode selection keys

Here is picture of rear view of WH108C operation panel.

1 2 3
Fig. 1-14 Rear view of WH108C operation panel

1. DB9M/F cable interface, used for connection with the host.

2. MPG interface, used for connection with MPG, or handle, handwheel.
3. Panel electrical switch, used for controlling power supply for the operation panel. See section 2.2 for
details.

CAUTION
1) A light on indicator on the upper-left side of a key represents for activation of the function indicated by the
key.
2) When a MPG is in need, please connect it to the default interface on the back of operation panel. If a MPG is
connected to MPG interface on Lambda 5S controller, you need to set parameter of manufacturer‟s access

Overview「9」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

“Handwheel connection mode” to “0” (the parameter is set to “1” by default); otherwise, the handwheel
cannot be enabled.

1.1.2 Mounting Dimension

1.1.2.1 Mounting Dimension of NK300CX Host
After NK300CX is installed on the machine, 100mm space should be preserved in its surrounding for
wiring convenience and ventilation.
The dimensional drawing of NK300CX-H is shown as Fig. 1-15, and that of NK300CX-V is shown as Fig.
1-16.

Dimension and cut-out of the host Dimension and cut-out of keypad panel

Dimension and cut-out of operation panel

Fig. 1-15 Dimensional drawing of NK300CX-H

「10」Overview
Specialized Concentrated Focused

NK300CX Display Panel Sheet Metal Cut-out drawing

WH108C Operation Panel Sheet Metal Cut-out drawing

Fig. 1-16 Dimensional drawing of NK300CX-V

1.1.2.2 Mounting Dimension of Lambda Controller 5S

Here is the dimensional drawing of Lambda controller 5S.

Fig. 1-17 Dimensional drawing of Lambda 5S controller

1.1.2.3 Mounting Dimension of EX31A

Here is dimensional drawing of extended terminal board EX31A1.

Overview「11」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

153 56.45

X01
+24V

S01
X03
X02

X05
X06
X00
S00

S02

S03
X09
X04

X07
COM

X08
POWER
SYSTEM
+3.3V

X00
X01
X02
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
X09
118

C00
Y00
Y01
Y02

Y03
Y04
Y05

Y06

Y07

Y08

Y09
C01

C02

C03

C04

C05
Y00 Y01 Y02 Y03 Y04 Y05 Y06 Y07 Y08 Y09

C00
Y00
Y01
Y02

Y03
Y04
Y05

Y06

Y07

Y08

Y09
C01

C02

C03

C04

C05

Fig. 1-18 Dimensional drawing of EX31A1

1.1.3 Overall Connection Diagram

To connect
X/Y/Z/A axis Two USB
to the drivers interfaces

Servo To connect
driver power supply
220V

Inverter

Servo
motor

MPG
Spindle motor

Fig. 1-19 Overall connection diagram of NK300CX-H

「12」Overview
Specialized Concentrated Focused

To
connect Two USB
the interfaces
drivers

Servo To connect
driver power supply
CN
3
220V
CN
1 Inverter
CN
2

Servo
motor

MPG
Spindle motor
Fig. 1-20 Overall connection diagram of NK300CX-V

1.2 Software
Based on embedded platform, software of NK300CX system consists of integral software and multi-Z
axes software. The former combines configurations of 3 axes, 4 axes, 5 axes as a whole. Furthermore, 3
axes configuration can be divided into three types, namely, standard, double Y and rotary table. 4 axes
configuration is divided into three types, namely, standard A-type, standard B-type and standard C-type.
5 axes configuration is divided into three types as well, that is, standard AB-type, standard BC-type and
standard AC-type. All types under different configurations can be switched in the software, making
NK300CX a multi-functional and versatile system. Multi-Z axes software includes linkage configuration
and alternative configuration, which is used for motion control of multi-Z axes.
Please note that contents in this manual is the introduction to integral software, taking standard type
under 3 axes configuration as examples, if there is no special explanation. Special introduction to multi-Z
axes software is presented in exclusive chapters.
Software user interface or HMI is composed of 6 functional areas, which can be switched by 6 functional
keys on the right side of the host. Here is the layout of main interface in auto mode, as shown below.
Refer to chapter 3 for detailed introduction to operations of each function.

Overview「13」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 1-21 Example of main interface of standard type of 3 axes software

Following is brief introduction to six functional areas.

 Machining functional area

「Coor」and「Machining」interfaces are folded in this area, where you can set frequently-used
parameters, conduct frequently-used operations (e.g. returning to the machine origin, tool calibration,
returning to the fixed point, etc.) and auxiliary functions (e.g. HW guide, single block and selective
machining, etc.), simulate and obtain machining-related information.

 Advance functional area

「Coor Manager」and「Tool Manager」interfaces are folded in this area, where you can set workpiece
offset and public offsets values, and access tool management.

 Program functional area

Five interfaces are folded in this area, and they are 「Local」,「USB」, 「Network」, 「Wizard」and
「History」interfaces. In this area, you can operate on various program files, both stored in the system
and in removable flash disk as well as on the network. In addition, you can load file into the system or
track the history.

 System functional area

「System」and「Computer」interfaces are folded in this area, where you can access functions related to
registration, maintenance and network setting. Besides, such information as software version, serial No.
of the board card and network setting can be obtained in this area.

 Parameter functional area

Four interfaces, 「Machine/Controller」,「Axis」,「Personalized」and「Screw Error Comp」, are folded

in this area, where you can set and check settings of parameters of different accesses.

「14」Overview
Specialized Concentrated Focused

 Diagnosis functional area

Four interfaces, 「Alarm」「Log」「Port」and「Diagnosis」, are folded here. You can check information
of alarm events, warning, logs, ports, feedback pulses and coordinates, etc.

Overview「15」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

2 Wiring
2.1 Signal Types ...........................................................................................................................................17
2.1.1 Binary Input Signal ................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.2 Relay Output Signal .................................................................................................................................. 17
2.1.3 Differential Output Signal ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.1.4 Analog Output Signal ............................................................................................................................... 18

2.2 Wiring Diagram of Electrical Switch on Operation Panel ........................................................................19

2.3 Pin Definition and Wiring Specification .................................................................................................19

「16」Overview
Specialized Concentrated Focused

2.1 Signal Types

The signal types of NK300CX system can be divided into the following 4 types: binary input signal, relay
output signal and differential output signal and analog signal.

2.1.1 Binary Input Signal

Binary input signal is active low/high. Conducting to GND (i.e. grounding signal) in NO connection
means signal detected, while disconnecting with GND in NC connection means signal detected.

Lambda 5S series controller

COM +24V

+24V COM
IN

Fig. 2-1 Connection of binary input and mechanical switch

CAUTION
NK300CX system supports inputs active high/low. When the common port S on the Lambda 5S controller is
connected to COM, inputs are active high after they are connected to +24V; when connected to +24V, inputs are
active low after they are connected to COM.

2.1.2 Relay Output Signal

The outputs on the Lambda 5S controller are relay outputs, and the relay output contact points have load
capacity—7A/250VAC and 7A/30VDC, to control 220V AC load of low power. If high power load is
needed, a contactor can be used. See Fig. 2-2.

Wiring「17」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Machine Tool
Lambda 5S
(An example)
Controller
AC
C

Control
Output
OUT1

Control
Output
OUT2

Fig. 2-2 Connection of relay output and contactor

2.1.3 Differential Output Signal

Pulse command format to control driver motion is pulse + direction, negative logic. The maximum pulse
frequency is 1MHz. See Fig. 2-3 for pulse mode.

Forward Rotation Reverse Rotation

1 2 3 1 2 3
PUL+

DIR+ ‘L’ ‘H’

Fig. 2-3 Pulse command output mode

See Fig. 2-4 for differential signal output mode.

Lambda 5S Controller
VCC
P-
P
P+

Fig. 2-4 Pulse command output circuit

2.1.4 Analog Output Signal

SVC port, externally connected with the inverter analog voltage frequency command input port, can
output voltage controlled from 0V to 10V. And it can control inverter frequency by voltage change in order
to master spindle speed.

「18」Wiring
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Lambda 5S Controller
Analog +24V
+ 47Ω
SVC
-

Fig. 2-5 Analog output signal circuit

2.2 Wiring Diagram of Electrical Switch on

Operation Panel
Stop
220V
Coil
contact
Start

Stop NO

220V NO
contact
Start
KM1
NO

KM1

Fig. 2-6 Wiring diagram of electrical switch on operation panel

2.3 Pin Definition and Wiring Specification

2.3.1 Driver Interface Definition

NK300CX system provides 4 pulse feed driver interfaces. The type of the 4 interfaces is 15-pin D-type
socket (DB15 pins). The pins definition as follow:

15: GND 5: C+
14: DIR- 10: ALM-RST
4: B-
13: DIR+ 9: SON 3: B+
8: ALM
12: PUL- 2: A-
7: C- 1: A+
11: PUL+
6: +24V

Fig. 2-7 Driver interface definition

Wiring「19」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Table 2-1 Driver interface definition

Name Definition Input /Output Description

Feedback signal of Input, differential signal
A+, A-
encoder phase A transmission mode Receive the differential output from
Feedback signal of Input, differential signal encoder signal (phase A, B, C) of
B+, B-
encoder phase B transmission mode driver frequency divider (equaling to
Feedback signal of Input, differential signal RS422).
C+, C-
encoder phase C transmission mode
When breakdown occurs in driver,
ALM Driver alarm signal Input the output (transistor) will be closed
or disconnected.
This signal is used for opening
(power on) and closing (power off)
servo motor. When this signal is
SON Servo ON signal Output
connected to COM-, dynamic brake
will be released and thus the driver
is allowed to work (servo enabled).
This signal is used for alarm/warning
Driver alarm clear
ALM-RST Output status clear, and can only remove
signal
the alarms that can be removed.
PUL+, Output, differential signal
Pulse output
PUL- transmission mode
DIR+, Output, differential signal
Direction output
DIR- transmission mode
+24V DC 24V power Output Connected to driver

CAUTION
SON signal will be effective in 2 seconds after connecting of power supply. Don‟t try to drive the motor through
the external servo ON or servo OFF drive signal at any time, since the software will control the power-up state of
the servo motor.

2.3.2 Handwheel Interface Definition

NK300CX can be externally connected to a manual pulse generator (MPG, or called handwheel). The
interface consists of DB15-pins dual-in-line holes, and the pins definition is as shown below.

「20」Wiring
Specialized Concentrated Focused

1:+5V 9: HSU
2:HA
3:HB 10: HSA
4:NC 11: GND
5:NC 12: HSB
6:HX1 13: HSZ
7:HX10 14: HSY
8:HX100 15: HSX

Fig. 2-8 Handwheel interface definition

Table 2-2 Description of handwheel interface

Pin No. Definition Description

1 +5V Power on handwheel
2 HA Encoder phase A signal
3 HB Encoder phase B signal
4 NC
5 NC
6 HX1 Selection of X1 override
7 HX10 Selection of X10 override
8 HX100 Selection of X100 override
9 HSU Selection of the 4th axis
10 HSA Selection of the 5th axis
11 GND Digital ground
12 HSB Selection of the 6th axis
13 HSZ Selection of Z-axis
14 HSY Selection of Y-axis
15 HSX Selection of X-axis

2.3.3 USB Interface

There are two USB interfaces at the back of NK300CX host, another one on the front for external
connection of an USB device (E.g. U disk).

Wiring「21」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3 Software Operation
3.1 Denbugging Steps ..................................................................................................................................26

3.2 I/O Ports Polarity Adjustment ................................................................................................................27

3.3 Adjustment of Axis Direction and Pulse Equivalent ................................................................................30

3.4 Encoder Feedback ..................................................................................................................................34

3.5 Returning to Machine Origin ..................................................................................................................36

3.5.1 Software Operation.................................................................................................................................. 36
3.5.1.1 The Process of Returning to Machine Origin ................................................................................... 37
3.5.2 Returning to Machine Origin under Three Axes Configuration ................................................................ 37
3.5.3 Personalized Setting of Axes Order in Returning to REF Point ................................................................. 38
3.5.4 Principle of Returning to Machine Origin (without Encoder Feedback) .................................................. 40
3.5.5 Principle of Returning to Machine Origin (with Encoder Feedback) ........................................................ 42
3.5.6 Parameter Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 43
3.5.7 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................... 45

3.6 Returning to Machine Origin (with Absolute Encoder Function) ............................................................47

3.6.1 Functional Environment........................................................................................................................... 47
3.6.2 Related Parameter Setting ....................................................................................................................... 48
3.6.2.1 Enable Absolute Encoder Function.................................................................................................. 48
3.6.2.2 Machine Position-related Parameter Setting .................................................................................. 48
3.6.3 Initialization of Absolute Type Encoder ................................................................................................... 49
3.6.3.1 Situations Where Initialization Is A Must ........................................................................................ 49
3.6.3.2 Steps of Initialization ....................................................................................................................... 49
3.6.4 Software Operation.................................................................................................................................. 50
3.6.5 Parameter Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 52

「22」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.7 Preheat and Wear ..................................................................................................................................53

3.8 Spindle Parameter Adjustment ..............................................................................................................56

3.9 Tool Measurement .................................................................................................................................58

3.10 Offset Setting of Workpiece Coordinate System .....................................................................................65

3.10.1 Workpiece Coordinate System ............................................................................................................ 65
3.10.2 Extended Coordinate System ............................................................................................................... 67
3.10.3 Software Interface ............................................................................................................................... 67

3.11 Centering ...............................................................................................................................................70

3.12 Adjustment of Velocity & Acceleration ..................................................................................................72

3.13 Simulation & Track .................................................................................................................................79

3.14 Compensation .......................................................................................................................................83

Software Operation「23」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.14.4 Across Quadrant Error Compensation ................................................................................................. 95

3.15 Log and Diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................96

3.16 Program File Management ....................................................................................................................99

3.16.1 Machining Wizard................................................................................................................................ 99
3.16.2 Program File ...................................................................................................................................... 102
3.16.3 History ............................................................................................................................................... 106
3.16.4 Parameter Specification ..................................................................................................................... 107

3.17 Handwheel Operation..........................................................................................................................110

3.18 System Management ...........................................................................................................................113

3.19 Auxiliary Function ................................................................................................................................123

3.20 Tool Magazine ......................................................................................................................................130

「24」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.20.3 Auto Tool Change for A Servo Tool Magazine .................................................................................... 134
3.20.4 Prompt for Tool Change ..................................................................................................................... 135
3.20.5 Parameter Specifications ................................................................................................................... 136

Software Operation「25」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.1 Debugging Steps

Debugging starts

(1) Refer to Chapter 3.18.2 “Configuration & Language Setting”

for system configuration selection

Configuration setting is correct

No
or not?

Yes
(2) Refer to Chapter 3.2“Ports Polarity Adjustment” for adjusting
polarity of I/O ports

Port detecting is correct or

No
not?
Yes
(3) Refer to Chapter 3.3 “Adjustment of Axis Direction & Pulse
Equivalent” for the setting of axis direction & pulse equivalent
and worktable stroke range

No
Machine motion dimension is correct or not?

Yes
(4) Refer to Chapter 3.4“Encoder Feedback” for the setting of
axis encoder directions

Is axis encoder direction correct? No

Yes

(5) Refer to Chapter 3.5&3.6“Returning to Machine Origin” for

returning to machine origin

Returning to machine origin is No

correct or not?
Yes

(6) Refer to Chapter 3.8 “Spindle Parameter Adjustment” for

adjusting spindle parameters

Be satisfied with debugging No

results or not?
Yes

(7) Refer to Chapter 3.12“Adjustment of Velocity &

Acceleration” for velocity adjustment

No
Motion is steady or not?

Yes

(8) Refer to Chapter 3.9 ―Tool Measurement‖& Chapter 3.10

―Offset Setting‖ for setting workpiece coordinate system (WCS)

WCS is suitable or
No
not?
Yes

Debugging ends, ready for machining

Fig. 3-1 Debugging Steps

「26」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.2 I/O Ports Polarity Adjustment

The polarities of input/ output ports in the software are specified in terms of the switch type: the polarity
of normally closed switches should be ―NC‖; the polarity of normally open switches should be ―NO‖. On
the software interface, the ports with preceding filled dot are input ports, while the ones with hollow
point are output ports.
After the connection of a machine tool and power on, the dots should be in red in front of reference point,
E-stop, cycle start, cycle stop and tool sensor signal indicating these signals are invalid, or it is
necessary to check whether the connection is correct. If there is no problem with the connection, the
polarity of the corresponding port should be changed.

The method of modifying polarity: press key to access functional area [Diagnosis] , then press
key ―3‖ to enter interface 「Port(3)」. Select the target I/O port for modification by pressing key ―↑‖ and
―↓‖, and then press F4 to modify the polarity of the port. Restart to validate the modification.
Interface 「Port (3)」 is as shown in Fig. 3-2, and some function screens need password before
operation, such as [Test On], [Test Off], [Cancel All Tests], [Invert Polarity], [Set Port Filter Time] and
[Port Protection].

Fig. 3-2 Interface「Port(3)」

 Test On/Off

The shortcut keys are ―F1‖ and ―F2‖ respectively, which are only available on interface 「Port(3)」.
Press F1 or F2 to make the indicator light before the port selected shift between green and red. Green
light means there is signal in the port; red light means there is no signal in the port.
This group of keys is mainly used for simulating hardware signal, which is for simulation test.

Software Operation「27」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

CAUTION
The indicator lights before ports are slightly different in test mode and in practice:
Green light in test mode: Red light in test mode:
Green light in practice: Red light in practice:

 Cancel All Tests

Press F3 to cancel simulation test and signals to replace analog signals with real hardware signals.

 Invert Polarity

Press F4 to change port polarity between NO and NC.

The polarities of feedrate override, spindle override, mode switch, handwheel and encoder zero should
be ―NO‖.
Except for particularly defined ones, the polarities of output ports are generally ―NO‖.

 Set Port Filter Time

Pressing F5 can open a dialog box where you can set filter time, with unit of ―ms‖. A lot interference
signal can be ruled out if a reasonable filter time has been set. For example, once occurrence time of the
signal is shorter than the filter time, it will be defined as interference signal and be neglected.

 Monitor Port

Locate cursor to target port by pressing arrow keys, and press F6 to monitor the port. Refer to section
3.15.4 for detail.

 Show All

Press F7 to display all I/O ports, including those are hidden by default. Press F7 again to hide all I/O
ports not in use.

 Port Protection

In situation that a certain machine state is required even after the software and the controller are
disconnected, port protection function is the solution. You can set target ports and select the protection
type before disconnection.
Press F8 to open dialog box ―Port Protection‖, as shown below.

「28」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-3 Dialog Box “Port Protection”

 Add

Press F1 to add a new group of ports to be protected (up to 32 groups of ports can be supported). Press
arrow keys to locate cursor onto target port or input box, and press Enter key to open input box, where
you can input or modify the content. At last, press F7 to confirm setting or modification. In this process,
following contents are required to be set.
 Output port (Outport for short) & Input port (Inport for short)
I/O ports on Lambda controller needs to be set. Input the PLC address of the port into input box, e.g.
10001, and press F7 for confirmation. Once set, corresponding information ―10001[Y01, Brake]‖ will
appear on interface, as shown in Fig. 3-3. For those undefined I/O ports, their status will remain the
same before and after disconnection of the software and the controller.
 Protection Type
There are four protection types offered, all taking effect after disconnection of the software and the
controller.
(1) ―Enable‖ refers to enabling the output port.
(2) ―Disable‖ refers to disabling the output.
(3) ―Following input‖ refers to making the status of output ports follow those of input ports. If an input
port is enabled, the output port will also be enabled; if an input port is disabled, the output port will
also be disabled.
(4) ―Reverse input‖ refers to making the status of output ports opposite to those of input ports. If an
input port is enabled, the output port will be disabled; if an input port is disabled, the output port will
be enabled.

 Delete

Press F2 to delete the ports which need no port protection.

Software Operation「29」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

 OK

Press F7 to confirm port protection setting.

 Cancel

Press F8 to back to the interface 「Port (3)」.

CAUTION
1) Addition, modification and deletion of port setting will be effective after the software is restarted.
2) For protection type “Enable” and “Disable”, the input port is NA as default and cannot be set; for protection
type “Following input” and “Reverse input”, the input port should be set.
3) The input port and the output port should be on the same terminal board, and the port address should be valid
PLC address.
4) Output port “Brake” must be set as protection port.
5) When output ports change, the protection type of the ports will be reset as “Enable”, and the relevant input
ports will be reset as NA. When protection type changes, the input port will be reset as NA while the output
port remains the same.

3.3 Adjustment of Axis Direction and Pulse

Equivalent

3.3.1 Axis Direction Adjustment

The first thing to do in machine debugging is to confirm the positive direction of each axis. The
coordinate system of right-hand rule is as shown in Fig. 3-4.

+Y
+B +Z
+X+Y+Z
+Y
+X
+X
+C +A

+Z +Y +A+B
+C
+X
+Z

Fig. 3-4 Standard Coordinate System of Right-hand Rule

「30」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

The axis directions of a machine are decided by both the type of the machine tool and the layout of each
component. The basic coordinate axes of engraving & milling machines/ routers are X-, Y-, and Z-axis:
——Z-axis is coincidental with spindle axis and the direction of the cutter moving away from workpiece is
the positive direction of Z-axis (+Z).
——X-axis is perpendicular to Z-axis and parallel to the clamped surface of workpiece. For a single
column vertical milling machine, if the user faces the spindle and looks in the column direction, right
moving direction is the positive direction of X-axis (+X).
——The positive direction of Y-axis is the cutter moving away from the operator (+Y).

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

―1‖ and ―-1‖ represent the
Axis Direction It specifies the motion direction of
N10000 two motion directions of
(X/Y/Z) each axis.
each axis.
Fix the positive direction of each axis following the right-hand rule, and then manually operate the
machine to check if the axis moves in the correct direction. If the direction is opposite, modify the
value of N10000. Taking X-axis as an example, manually move X-axis, just to find it moves
oppositely, just change the X value of N10000 from ―-1‖ (―1‖) to ―1‖ (―-1‖).

3.3.2 Pulse Equivalent Adjustment

Pulse equivalent (p): the moving distance of workbench or rotation degree of rotary axis per pulse sent
by the CNC device, the minimum available distance controlled by the CNC system as well. Pulse
equivalent can be calculated in terms of screw pitch, electronic gear ratio, mechanical deceleration ratio
and other relevant info.
The smaller the pulse equivalent is, the higher the machining precision and surface quality will be. The
large, the faster feedrate will be. Therefore, lower pulse equivalent should be set under condition of
meeting the demand of feedrate. The relationship between maximum feedrate and pulse equivalent is as
following:
Max. Feedrate  Pulse Equivalent  60  Frequency

For example, the hardware frequency of NK300CX is 1MHz, and provided the pulse equivalent is
0.001mm/p, then:
Max. Feedrate  0.001 60  1000000  60m / min

Mechanical deceleration ratio (m/n): the ratio of reducer input speed to output speed, equal to the ratio of
the teeth number of driven wheel to that of driving wheel. When applied in CNC machines, it specifies
the ratio of motor speed to screw speed.
Re ducer Input Speed Teeth No. of Driven Wheel Motor Rotational Speed
Mechanical Deceleration Ratio   
Re ducer Output Speed Teeth No. of Driving Wheel Screw Roational Speed

Pitch (d): The axial distance between the corresponding points of two adjacent teeth on the threads.
The calculation of pulse equivalent varies with different motor systems.

Software Operation「31」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

 Stepping Motor
In general, firstly set the subdivision and then calculate the pulse equivalent. You can also set the pulse
equivalent before calculating subdivision. Their relationship can be shown as:
d 360 m
 x
p  n
Hereinto, p stands for pulse equivalent, x represents subdivision of stepping motor while θ refers to
stepping angle. Therefore,
Screw Pitch
Pulse Equivalent 
360
 Subdivision  Mechanical Deceleration Ratio
Stepping Angle
For instance, the selected screw lead of X-axis for a certain type of machine tool is 5mm, the stepping
angle of stepping motor is 1.8 degree, with ―10‖ subdivision and motor directly connected with screw by
coupling. Thus, the pulse equivalent of X-axis is:
5mm
Pulse Equivalent   0.0025mm/p
360
 10  1
1.8

 Servo Motor
In general, set the default value of pulse equivalent (p) as 0.001mm/p and calculate electronic gear ratio
(B/A). Their relationship can be shown as:
B Encoder Resolution
Electronic Gear Ratio   Mechanical Deceleration Ratio
A Screw Pitch
Pulse Equivalent
B Fp m
Namely,  
A d n

Electronic gear ratio: if servo motor makes one circle per every 5000 pulse commands sent by the
system, setting electronic gear ratio of servo motor can make servo rotate twice with the same amount of
pulse commands (please refer to parameters setting of the specific servo).
Please see the servo motor label plate compared to the corresponding manual to confirm its encoder
resolution. A label plate of YASKAWA SGMSH type servo is as shown below, and the 4 th character in
motor type is the serial encoder specification, with resolution of 217, i.e. 131072.

Motor Type：
TYPE SGMSH-1 0 A C A 2 1
(The 4th Character)

The 4th Character: Serial Encoder Spec.

Sign Spec. Remark

2 17-bit absolute Standard

C 17-bit incremental Standard

Fig. 3-5 Servo Motor Brand-encoder Resolution

For instance: (an example of YASKAWA servo) screw pitch of a certain type of machine is 5mm, with 17

「32」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

bit encoder resolution, ―0.0002mm/p‖ pulse equivalent and ―1:1‖ deceleration ratio.

PN202 217 131072 16384

Electronic Gear Ratio = = 1 = =
PN203 5 / 0.0002 5 / 0.0002 3125
The pulse equivalent of rotary axis refers to the rotation degree of the axis clamping the workpiece
corresponding to each pulse. The rotated degree of workpiece per revolution of motor equals to screw
pitch.

 For Stepping Motor

360
Pulse Equivalent 
360
 Subdivision  Mechanical Deceleration Ratio
Stepping Angle

 For Servo Motor

B Encoder Resolution  Pulse Equivalent
Electronic Gear Ratio   Mechanical Deceleration Ratio
A 360

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

Pulse Equivalent It refers to the displacement or angle generated
N10010 9e-007~999
(X/Y/Z-axis) on the relative feed axis per control pulse.

CAUTION
The setting of pulse equivalent must be matching with the electronic gear ratio of servo driver or subdivision of
stepping driver.

3.3.3 Upper & Lower Limit Setting of Worktable Stroke

Worktable stroke refers to the valid machining stroke range of a machine tool in the X, Y, and Z directions,
and the system will carry out soft limit in terms of this range in order to protect the machine.

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

It sets the machine coordinate of the
Travel
N10020 allowable lower limit of worktable when -99999~99999
Limits-Negative(X/Y/Z)
the parameter N10040 is valid.
It sets the machine coordinate of the
Travel
N10030 allowable upper limit of worktable when -99999~99999
Limits-Positive(X/Y/Z)
the parameter N10040 is valid.
Enable Travel Limits It sets whether to check the stroke range YES: Valid
N10040
(X/Y/Z) of worktable. NO: Invalid

Software Operation「33」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

It sets the machine coordinate of the
N67000 Negative Change Tool allowable lower limit of travel in tool
-99999~99999
~N67002 Travel Limits (X/Y/Z) change when the parameter N10040 is
valid.
It sets the machine coordinate of the
N67010 Positive Change Tool allowable upper limit of travel in tool
-99999~99999
~N67012 Travel Limits (X/Y/Z) change when the parameter N10040 is
valid.

CAUTION
In the first setting of the upper & lower limit of worktable stroke, please verify the actually valid range of machine
motion in case of accident.

3.4 Encoder Feedback

3.4.1 Encoder Feedback Function

Encoder feedback function is used to measure and give feedback to angular displacement and linear
displacement of a screw servo motor. Encoder feedback can be set through modifying parameter
N11000 ―Encoder Feedback‖.
If parameter N11000 is set as ―NO‖, the machine returns to machine origin without encoder feedback.
Please see section 3.5.2 for the principle and process of the returning. If parameter N11000 is set as
―YES‖, the machine returns to machine origin with encoder feedback. Please see section 3.5.3 for the
principle and process of the returning.

3.4.2 Setting Axis Encoder Direction

You can set the axis encoder direction by setting the value of parameter N11110 ―Axis Encoder Dir‖.
There are two methods to decide and set the axis encoder direction, namely setting via operation and
setting via reasoning.
 Setting via Operation
Taking X-axis as an example, manually move X-axis towards positive direction, and during the process,
press E-stop button. If the coordinate value after adjustment is larger than the value before adjustment, it
tells that the current [Axis Encoder Dir] is correct, otherwise, incorrect.
Likewise, manually move X-axis towards negative direction, and during the process, press E-stop button.
If the coordinate value after adjustment is smaller than the value before adjustment, it tells that the

「34」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

current [Axis Encoder Dir] is correct, otherwise, incorrect.

It is the same operation with other axes.
 Setting via Reasoning
On condition that the axis direction and pulse equivalent settings are correct:
Axis Encoder Direction  Axis Direction  Logical Direction
For example, setting X-axis direction to -1, and pulse to ―Pulse + Direction, Negative Logic‖. The value of
parameter N11110 will be 1= [(-1)*(-1)].

CAUTION
Please refer to section 3.3.1 for axis direction setting, and refer to section 2.3.1 for pulse direction setting.

3.4.3 Encoder Error

Encoder error refers to the absolute difference value of pulse number sent and fed back. (E.g. value of
|Un00C – Un00D| in YASKAWA servo) when the detected value is larger than the allowable value set by
the parameter, the system will stop emergently and report ―(X/Y/Z) Axis dynamic / static error alarm‖.
The dynamic encoder error refers to the error in running.
Motion Speed
Dynamic Error =
Position Loop Gain
Assuming that the feedrate of X-axis is 6000mm/min, or 100mm/s, position loop gain of servo driver is
100s-1, the X-axis dynamic error will be 100mm/s ÷100s-1=1mm. If the pulse equivalent is 0.001mm/p,
the dynamic of X-axis at 6000mm/min will be 1000p. At this time, if the parameter setting value is lower
than 1000p, and X-axis has already returned to the REF point, the system will alarm and prompt X-axis
dynamic error exceeding setting value and the X-axis will make relative adjustment.
Static error refers to the encoder error when the system is in idle (with idle time longer than 8s). It can be
set through parameter N11140 ―Static Tolerance‖. Default is 500.

3.4.4 Setting Frequency Division Pulses of PG(X4)

Parameter N11160 ―Frequency Division Pulses of PG(X4)‖ refers to encoder feedback pulse numbers
via the frequency division of servo per revolution of motor, or encoder feedback pulse numbers when the
linear axis moves a screw pitch. In actual debugging, you can set it according to the parameter setting of
servo drivers. See user‘s manuals of drivers of other brands.

3.4.5 Encoder Feedback Parameter Specification

 Related Parameters(modification of all parameters except N80050 in this part needs
manufacturer’s access)

Software Operation「35」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

Whether to enable encoder feedback Yes: Enable;
N11000 Encoder Feedback
function or not. No: Disable
1: Positive
N11110 Axis Encoder Dir It specifies the direction of encoder.
-1: Negative
Whether to check the encoder error
Check Encoder Yes: Check;
N11130 between feedback value and output
Error No: Not check
value or not.
When the axis is steady, if the difference
between the feedback value and output
N11140 Static Tolerance 1~999999
value is bigger than this value, alarm will
occur.
When the axis is dynamic, if the
difference between the feedback value
N11150 Dynamic Tolerance 1~999999
and output value is bigger than this value,
alarm will occur.
It specifies the encoder feedback pulse
Frequency Division
N11160 number via frequency division of servo 1~999999
Pulses of PG (*4)
per revolution of motor.
It shows debug info about the process of
Yes: Show
N80050 Print Info returning to the REF point (only used for
No: Not to show
machine with encoder at present).

3.5 Returning to Machine Origin

Origin of Machine Coordinate System (inherent coordinate system of a machine tool), also called
mechanical origin, and home, is a fixed point assigned by design, manufacturing and debugging before
the machine tool leaving factory. After startup of the CNC system, it is necessary to back to machine
origin (home all axes) manually or automatically.

CAUTION
The below functions will not be activated until backing to machine origin completed: soft limit, setting fixed point
and tool change.

3.5.1 Software Operation

This section focuses on introduction to operation procedure and software interface of returning the
machine origin under three axes configuration. With four/five axes configuration activated, returning
order can be customized.

「36」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.5.1.1 The Process of Returning to Machine Origin

The processes of returning to machine origin of X, Y, Z-axis are included and identical, as shown in Fig.
3-6 (an example of X-axis).

Beginning of returning to
machine origin of X-axis

Turn to “REF. Point” mode,

press an X-axis direction key

X-axis moves towards coarse positioning

direction until detecting REF. point signal

No
Has coarse positioning
finished?
Yes

X-axis moves towards fine positioning

direction until detecting encoder zero signal

Has fine positioning No

finished?

Yes

Check the distance between fine

positioning and coarse positioning
switches
Out of error range, the system will prompt an alarm Out of normal range, the system will prompt an alarm
The result error of returning machine home for X axis was The distance of coarse/fine positioning switch for X axis was too
out of range close

Distance between fine and coarse

positioning switches normal?

Yes
Adjust the switch position
Check switch
of fine/ coarse positioning
precision X-axis moves retract distance
on the machine
Refer to Chapter 3.6.6 Refer to Chapter 3.6.6

End of returning to
machine origin of X-axis

Fig. 3-6 The Process of Returning to Machine Origin (X-axis)

3.5.1.2 Returning to Machine Origin under Three Axes Configuration

Under three axes standard configuration, turn the system into REF point mode, press key to
enter interface 「Coor (1)」, as shown in Fig. 3-7.

Software Operation「37」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-7 Three Axes Standard Configuration—Returning to REF Origin

 X-axis/Y-axis/Z-axis/XY axes Returning to Machine Origin

Press F1/F2/F3 to return a single axis to the REF point at a time. Press F5 to return X-axis and Y-axis to
the REF point at the same time.
The system entitles Z-axis the highest priority in returning REF point by default. If Z-axis is returned first,
a prompt box will pop up, as shown in Fig. 3-8. Select ―No‖ to exit the operation and ―Yes‖ to make the
selected axis return to the REF point.

Fig. 3-8 Dangerous Operation Prompt

 All Axes Returning to the Machine Origin

Press F8 to execute operation ―All axes REF Return‖. For safety, Z-axis will return to REF point before
other axes return to REF point.

3.5.1.3 Personalized Setting of Axes Order in Returning to REF Point

Compared to three axis configuration, four axis configuration and five axis configuration have one more
function--personalized setting of axes order in returning to REF point. There are two flexible ways to
return to the REF point, ―Set Single REF Return‖ and ―Set All REF Return‖. You can customize the axes
order in returning to REF point according to your needs. An introduction to the function under four-axis A
model configuration is as follows.

In reference point mode, press key and key ―1‖ to enter interface 「Coor(1)」 under functional
area [Machining], as shown in Fig. 3-9.

「38」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-9 Interface 「Coor(1)」 under Four Axis A model configuration

 Set Single REF Return

Press F1 to open dialog box ―Set Single REF Return‖, as shown in Fig. 3-10. 8 lines of order rules are
supported in this box. And symbol ―>‖ represents that axis at the left of the symbol obtains higher priority
than that at the right in returning to REF point. For example, Z>X means that Z-axis has higher priority
than X-axis have in returning to REF point.
Press the direction keys or key ―Select‖ to choose an option from options ―X‖, ―Y‖, ―Z‖, ―A ― and ―NA‖ in
the input boxes in a rule. Please note that axis options are different under different configurations.
If you do not need any order rule, change the axis in the rule into ―NA‖ and press F7 to cancel the rule.

Fig. 3-10 Dialog Box “Set Single REF Return”

 Set All REF Return

Press F2 to open dialog box ―Set All REF Return‖, as shown in Fig. 3-11. Different from dialog box ―Set
Single REF Return‖, there is only one line of order rule. Options ―XY‖, ―Z‖, and ―A ― are available to be
entered in the input box. Press the direction keys or key ―Select‖ to choose an option in the input box. All
the starting axes must be inputted in the order rule. Please note axis options and number of axes are
different under different configurations.

Software Operation「39」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-11 Dialog Box “Set All REF Return”

CAUTION
1) There is no priority between the 8 order rules in “Set Single REF Return”.
2) Invalid rules will be filtered automatically by the system during setting oder rules. For example, rules such as
NA>A and A>NA will be regard as invalid rules.
3) Repeated or contradictory axis in setting oder rules are not allowed. For example, X>A and A>X is
contradictory , and X>X is reapted setting. Otherwise, prompt “There exists repeated or contradictory axis
when setting single axis REF returning order. Please check.” or “There exists repeated axis when setting all
axis REF returning order. Please check.” will pop up.

3.5.2 Principle of Returning to Machine Origin (without

Encoder Feedback)
The encoder feedback function is involved in the system, specified by parameter N11000. The sketch
map of returning to machine origin with servo motor is as below (without encoder feedback):
 Coarse Positioning Stage
C‟ C Legend：
Coarse Positioning Signal Belt

Initial stage
D Stop position after receiving signal
Enter into signal zone reversely
Leave signal zone reversely
Arrow tip indicates the machine stop position

B A Distance

Fig. 3-12 Sketch Map of Coarse Positioning (Stopping within the Signal Belt after Receiving Coarse Positioning Signal)

「40」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

C‟ C Legend：

Coarse Positioning Signal Belt

Initial stage
D Stop position after receiving signal
Enter into signal zone reversely
Leave signal zone reversely
Arrow tip indicates machine stop position

B A Distance

Fig. 3-13 Sketch Map of Coarse Positioning (Stopping Out of the Signal Belt after Receiving Coarse Positioning Signal)

1) When the machine keeps moving until receiving REF. point signal at place A, it should stop
immediately, but it may stop at place C or C‘ due to time lag and inertia.
2) The machine keeps moving reversely at one third of coarse positioning speed until receiving REF.
point signal (if the machine has stayed in the signal belt in the above step 1, it will make no motion in
this step).
3) The machine keeps moving reversely at one-tenth of coarse positioning speed until the REF. point
signal disappears (across the signal belt).
4) The machine halts at the red flag place D after the end of this stage.
 Fine positioning Stage
The process of fine positioning stage is identical with that of coarse positioning stage.
After coarse positioning, the machine will move to encoder zero rapidly, executing slow positioning
several times.
C‟ C
Coarse Positioning Signal Belt

Fine Positioning Signal Belt

B A Distance

Fig. 3-14 The Process of Fine Positioning

 Retracting Stage
After finishing the fine positioning stage, the system will execute retracting motion once with
recommended retract distance as half of the screw pitch. The sketch map is shown in Fig. 3-15.

Software Operation「41」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Retracting
C‟ C Distance

Coarse Positioning Signal Belt

Fine Positioning Signal Belt

B A Distance

Fig. 3-15 Retracting Stage

3.5.3 Principle of Returning to Machine Origin (with Encoder

Feedback)
With encoder feedback function, the system will execute coarse positioning and fine positioning only
once in returning to machine origin. The retracting distance after fine positioning is the actual retracting
distance adjusted in terms of actual situation. And the concrete process is as Fig. 3-16:

E F
Retracting
C distance

3 6
Coarse positioning

Fine positioning
signal belt
signal belt

2 5
1
Actual
4
retracting
distance

B A D

Legend:

1 Initial stage of coarse positioning

Overtravel stage after receiving

2 coarse positioning signal

3 Retracting stage after overtravel in coarse positioning

4 Initial stage of fine positioning

5 Overtravel stage after receiving fine position signal

6 Actual retracting stage

Fig. 3-16 The Process of Returning to Machine Origin

「42」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

1) In coarse positioning stage, the machine tool should stop immediately at place ―A‖ when receiving
REF. point signal, but it may stop at place ―C‖ due to over-travel caused by inertia and time-lag.
2) The machine executes retracting stage of coarse positioning.
3) In fine positioning stage, the machine tool moves reversely and should stop at place ―D‖
immediately when receiving encoder zero signal; at the meantime, the feedback data of encoder will
be latched, but the machine will generate over-travel and stop at place E due to inertia and time-lag.
And the displacement between encoder zero signal and stop position (i.e. DE) is the across
distance of signal deceleration.
4) In terms of the retracting distance and across distance calculated, calculate the actual retracting
distance, and use this actual distance to make the machine move and stop at place F, keeping it free
from the signal source.

3.5.4 Parameter Specifications

 Related Parameters of Safe Operations:

Parameter Details Setting Range

Back to REF Whether backing to machine origin YES: Required
N74001
Required before machining is required or not. NO: Not required
Returning to machine origin before machining can avoid machining offset to ensure position
precision. When N74001 is set to ―YES‖, if there is no backing to machine origin mark ― ‖or ―L‖
before each axis, the machine is not allowed to move until returning to REF. point is completed.
N74001 can be set to ―NO‖ when failure to return to machine origin is caused by home switch fault.

 Related Parameters in the Process of Backing to Machine Origin (N74090 under “Operation”,
others under “Axis Parameter”)

Parameter Details Setting Range

Times of fine positioning in returning
N74090 Home Latch Count to machine origin, with default 1~100
setting of ―1‖
0~ Upper limit of
Machine Zero Machine coordinate of machine
N74010 workbench stroke (the
Position origin, with default setting of ―0
value of N10030 )(mm)
Coarse Positioning The moving direction of machine at 1: Positive direction
N74020
Dir. any point towards home switch -1: Negative direction
Moving speed of machine towards
F in Coarse
N74030 home switch (coarse positioning 0.001~10000
Positioning
speed)
The input port PLC address of
Coarse Positioning
N74040 coarse positioning switch of each -
Switch Inport Addr.
axis
Fine Positioning The moving direction of machine at 1: Positive direction
N74050
Dir. (X/Y/Z) any point towards encoder zero -1: Negative direction

Software Operation「43」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

Moving speed of machine towards
F in Fine
N74060 encoder zero (fine positioning 0.001~10000
Positioning
speed)
The input port PLC address of
Fine Positioning
N74070 accurate positioning switch of each -
Switch Inport Addr.
axis
The additional moving distance
after the end of fine positioning in
Back Off Distance
N74080 returning to machine origin, i.e. -1000~1000
(X/Y/Z)
retract distance to move away from
signal sensitive zone.
In order to establish a machine coordinate system (MCS) correctly for machining, at machine
start-up, generally returning to reference point will be executed automatically or manually, i.e. the
machine tool will return to its measuring beginning (X, Y, Z=0) to establish the machine coordinate
system. Machine reference point can be coincident with machine origin (in default system setting),
or not, and the distance between reference point and machine origin can be specified by parameter
N74010.
When home switches work normally, if the spindle moves away from home switch direction in the
process of returning to machine origin (homing), the value of N74020 (coarse positioning direction),
opposite to that in fine positioning stage, should be modified, please refer to question No. 2 in
section 3.5.5 when the moving direction of machine is incorrect during backing to machine origin. If
the speed of returning to machine origin is too low, properly adjust the value of N74030 (coarse
positioning speed).
―Back Off Distance‖ refers to a certain moving distance away from REF. point to leave the signal
sensitive zone of home switches after backing to machine origin completed.

 Related Parameters to Detect Distance between Coarse and Fine Positioning Switches
(N74120 under “Operation”, others under “Axis Parameter”)

Parameter Details Setting Range

For analysis of switch distance of
N74100 Leadscrew Pitch fine and coarse positioning in 0~360
backing to machine origin
To detect whether the switches of
Coarse/ Fine
N74110 fine/coarse positioning are too close 0 ~ One half of screw pitch
Switches Min Dist
in backing to machine origin
The allowable error range by
Coarse/Fine Pos comparison of current result of
N74120 0~100
Distance Tolerance backing to machine origin with
history average record
Related to the specific machine tool, N74100 should be set after measured in actual operation.
Too close distance between home switch and encoder zero switch may lead to deviation of one

「44」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

screw pitch in REF. point positioning during returning to machine origin, and the system will check if
this offset is reasonable or not via parameter N74110 with setting range of ―0 ~ one half of screw
pitch‖ (unit: mm). The normal range of switch distance between fine and coarse positioning is (0+
value of N74110, screw pitch- value of N74110), and the switch distance will be automatically

measured in returning to origin. An alarm of ― The distance of coarse/fine positioning switch for Z axis was too close
‖ will occur if the
distance is out of the above range. To remove this error, adjust the home switch position or check if
the setting of parameter N74110 is reasonable or not.
With comparison between current measured value and history average value, the percentage of
―(current measured value – history average value) / history average value‖ should be within the
setting value of N74120; if not, this measured value is invalid. And the system will prompt alarm of

― The result error of returning machine home for Z axis was out of range
‖. Click the shortcut key N ― ‖ to
clear the measured history record after changing the home switch.

3.5.5 Troubleshooting
1. REF. point signal cannot be detected in the process of returning to machine origin. It is generally
caused by home switch fault. The adjusting & debugging steps are as shown in Fig. 3-17.

Software Operation「45」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-17 Debugging Steps

2. Incorrect motion direction of machine in returning to machine origin may be caused by the following
reasons:
1) Incorrect polarity of REF. point signal: when the home switch is normally open, the polarity is
―NO‖; when normally closed, the polarity should be ―NC‖.
2) Incorrect parameter setting: check the parameter N74020 ―Home Search Dir‖, and adjust the
related parameters.
3. Too slow coarse positioning speed in returning to machine origin may be caused by the below
reasons:
1) The setting value of N74030 ―Home Search Velocity‖ is too small.
2) The polarity setting of REF. point signal in the software is mismatching with the home switch
type. If a NC-type home switch is adopted and the polarity of REF. point signal is NO, the REF.

「46」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

point signal is valid at beginning of backing to machine origin, so the machine will slowly move
away from machine origin at the speed of fine positioning.
4. The distance between fine and coarse positioning is out of normal range, the system prompting an
The distance of coarse/fine positioning switch for Z axis was tool close
alarm ― ‖, which may be caused by too close switch
distance between fine and coarse positioning, so the actual position of home switch and encoder
zero should be readjusted to make the distance within the range of (0+ value of N74110, screw
pitch- value of N74110).
5. The distance between fine and coarse positioning is out of the allowable error range, the system

prompting an alarm ― The result error of returning machine home for Z axis was out of range
‖, with possible causes as below:

1) The accuracy error of home switch: check home switch precision.

2) The accuracy error of encoder zero: check whether encoder zero signal in the system is correct
or not.
3) After a home switch is reinstalled, the detecting environment changes in returning to machine
origin: press the shortcut key N to clear the history record of measurement.

3.6 Returning to Machine Origin (with

Absolute Encoder Function)
With absolute encoder function, on the one hand, there is no need to set returning orders of all axes in
datum setting process (process of returning to the machine origin); on the other hand, in case of
software restart, update, power interruption, or emergency stop and the like, there is no need to return to
the machine origin again in order to set datum when saving or exporting datum information, which will
simply the process and save preparation time.

3.6.1 Functional Environment

Requirements for the hardware are as follows:
(1) YASKAWA Σ-V Servo Driver
(2) Lambda 5E controller (Note that wiring diagram of Lambda 5E is the same with that of Lambda 5S)
(3) NK300CX integrated system
For servo driver, servo motor with absolute encoder should be used together. You can read nameplate of
the motor to make sure absolute encoder function is supported and refer to corresponding manual to get
information of encoder type. Here is an example of SGMJV motor.

Software Operation「47」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

SGMJV - 01 A D A H 1 2 1
Σ-V Series 1+2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8 bit 9 bit
Servo Motor
SGMJV

4 bit Serial Encoder

Symbol Specification
3 20-bit absolute (Standard)*
D 20-bit incremental type (Standard)
A 13-bit incremental type (Standard)

Fig. 3-18 Example of SGMJV motor nameplate

As shown above, the 4th character specifies the specification of serial encoder. You can further get
encoder type by referring to the driver manual. For example, if 4th character is ―3‖, the encoder type is
absolute type, to put it in other words, absolute function can be supported.

Before enabling the absolute encoder function, you need to do following jobs first:
1) Set relevant parameters in both driver and software;
2) Check whether initialization of the absolute encoder is required.

3.6.2 Related Parameter Setting

3.6.2.1 Enable Absolute Encoder Function
 Driver Parameter Setting

Set value of parameter Pn002 to decide the absolute encoder as incremental type encoder or absolute
type encoder. Specifically, if absolute encoder function is in need, set the second bit of Pn002 to ―0‖, that
is ―n.□0□□‖. Note that parameter modification takes effect after re-power on the driver.

CAUTION
There are altogether 4 bits for the driver parameter, that is, bit 0, bit 1, bit 2 and bit 3 from right to left.

 Software Parameter Setting

After locating to the parameter setting interface, press F8 to activate manufacturer‘s access, and find
parameter N11001 ―Encoder type‖, set it to ―1‖, enabling absolute type encoder; next, find parameter
N11000 ―Enable encoder feedback function‖ and set it to ―Yes‖, enabling encoder feedback function.

3.6.2.2 Machine Position-related Parameter Setting

When first use of encoder, relationship between absolute encoder and actual machine position should
be set, that is, to secure the machine origin. Once set, actual machine position can be directly read after
software startup.
Concrete machine position value is decided by setting values of driver parameter Pn000 and software

「48」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

parameter N11200. See below for details.

 Settings of Driver Parameter Pn000 and Software Parameter N11200

Setting values of Pn000 and N11200 should be matched, as follows:

(1) If driver parameter Pn000 is set to ―□□□0‖, the motor CCW rotation is regarded as the positive
direction, and software parameter N11200 should be set to ―-1‖ accordingly.
(2) If driver parameter Pn000 is set to ―□□□1‖, the motor CW rotation is regarded as the positive
direction, and software parameter N11200 should be set to ―1‖ accordingly.
Note that modification to Pn000 takes effect after re-power on the driver.

CAUTION
1) Viewing from load side of the servo motor, the positive direction in standard setting is counter-clockwise
rotation.
2) Positive/negative direction overtravel prohibition fucntion may be changed according to the selection of
motor rotational direction.

3.6.3 Initialization of Absolute Type Encoder

3.6.3.1 Situations Where Initialization Is A Must
In following situations, initialization operation to the absolute encoder is required:
(1) First time power on of the driver;
(2) Replacement of battery box for absolute encoder;
(3) Alarm ―(A.810) Encoder backup‖ occurs;
(4) Alarm ―(A.820) Encoder and verification‖ occurs.

3.6.3.2 Steps of Initialization

Note that initialization operation to encoder can ONLY be conducted at Servo-OFF. Detailed steps are as
follows:
Table 3-1 Operation steps of absolute encoder initialization

Panel display after

Step Buttons used Comments
operation

Press button MODE/SET to select

1
auxiliary function.

Software Operation「49」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Panel display after

Step Buttons used Comments
operation

Press button UP/DOWN to display

2
―Fn008‖.

Press button DATA/SHIFT for approx. 1s

3
to display ―PGCL1‖.

Continuously press button UP until

―PGCL5‖ appeared.
Note: if there is any wrong button
4 operations, ―n0_0P‖ will appear for
approx.1s before returning to AUX.
mode. At this time, you need to start
from the very beginning.
Press button MODE/SET.
Start to set (initialize) absolute encoder.
5 When setting (initialization) completes,
―donE‖ will appear in flashing way for
about 1s.

―PGCL5‖ will be displayed after ―donE‖

6
disappeared.

Continuously press button DATA/SHIFT

7
for approx. 1s, ―Fn008‖ will be displayed.

CAUTION
After absolute encoder is initialized, datum setting must be executed again.

3.6.4 Software Operation

With REF. point mode activated, press ==> 1 ==> F7 in turn to access the datum setting
interface, as shown below.

「50」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-19 Datum setting interface

 Software prompt when datum not set

If it is the first time datum setting operation is executed, prompt information in red ―Please initialize X/Y/Z
axis first and restart the software‖ will appear in info bar, as shown in above. You can follows the prompts
and make datum settings. After datum is well set, red prompt will disappear, at the same time, homing
symbol will appear in front of each axis, which means the system is ready for normal machining task.

 Datum setting in X/Y/Z axis

Manually move the axis to the fixed position on the machine, press F1/F2/F3 accordingly to set the
datum in X/Y/Z axis. A dialog box prompting ―Absolute position setting takes effect after restart, please
restart the software!‖ pops up. Choose ―Yes‖ and restart the software.

 Export

Previous datum setting information will lost after softwre upgrading. For this reason, you can choose
import/export function to save trouble of repeated setting of machine datum (or the reference point).
After datum has been well set, press F8 to save it to the root directory of U disk.

 Import

When a new software has been installed, press F7 to import or load datum information which has been
previously saved under root directory of U disk. At this time, a dialog box prompting ―Whether to import
datum file?‖ will appear.
If ―Yes‖ is chosen, prompt as ―Modification to absolute position initial setting takes effect after restart,
please restart the software!‖ Follow the tips to restart the software and make modification effective.
If ―No‖ is chosen, importation of datum information aborts.

Software Operation「51」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

CAUTION
1) Manufacturer‟s access is needed before datum setting;
2) Because of time sequence, it takes time for the software to read absolute data, possible resulting in interface
choking in datum setting.

3.6.5 Parameter Specifications

After locating to parameter management interface, press F8 to activate manufacturer‘s access.
Following parameters should be well set.

Parameter Content Range

Enable encoder Whether to enable encoder feedback Yes: Enable
N11000
feedback function function or not. No: Disable
It specifies encoder type, which can
be divided into incremental type and
0: Incremental type encoder;
N11001 Encoder type absolute type. LD5E controller is
1: Absolute type encoder.
required to work together with
absolute type encoder.
Axial encoder It specifies the encoder direction of
1; -1
direction each axis.
Decide the encoder direction as formual below:
N11110
Encoder direction  Axis direction  Logic control direction
Positive logic is adopted by default. If negative logic is used, driver parameter Pn200 should
be set to 0005.
It specifies pluse number fed back
PG division ratio
from the encoder via servo division 1~999999
(X4)
per one motor revolution.
When setting in the software, you can figure out value of PG division ratio as formula below:

PG division ratio  Pn212  4

N11160
Setting of Pn212 is shown as table below:

Encoder divider pulse No. Velocity Position Torque

Type
Pn212 Range Unit Default setting Effective time

16～230 1 P/Rev 2048 After Re-power ON Setting

「52」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Content Range

1: CW as the positive direction;
-1: CCW as the positive direction.
Motor rotate mode This parameter needs to be set only 1; -1
when absolute type encoder is
N11200 enabled.
If driver parameter Pn000 is set to □□□0, the motor takes CCW as positive direction, and
software parameter N11200 should be set to -1 accordingly; while if driver parameter Pn000
is set to □□□1, the motor takes CW as positive direction, and software parameter N11200
should be set to 1.
It specifies time used to make the
N11303 Wait time at E-stop machine stop completely when 0.5~10s
E-stop is cancelled.
It is used to analyse the distance
between coarse positioning switch
Screw pitch 0~360mm
and fine positioning switch during
returning to the reference point.
N74100
In case of directly-connected rail, set screw travel to the value of pitch; in case of gear, set

Mechanical deceleration ratio

screw travel to the result of ― ‖.
Screw pitch

3.7 Preheat and Wear

After the machine tool is power on, some functions are not stable enough for the tool machine to
machine workpiece. To achieve the best machining state of a machine tool, you must preheat and wear
the spindle, trial run some properties, such as the spindle speed and the maximal spindle speed, and
adjust the relevant parameters before start machining.
After all axes returning to the machine origin, set the value of parameter ―N78000 Warm-up and trial-run
switch‖ as ―YES‖, and the system will start preheating and wearing automatically. The flow chart of the
proces is as below.

Software Operation「53」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

All axes return to machine origin

Preheat and wear swtich End

Whether to preheat and End

wear

YES YES
Preheat swtich Wear Swtich

YES YES

Whether turn on coolant in Whether turn on lubricate in

preheating wearing

YES

Coolant cannot be turned on NO

Turn on lubricate once NO
Save the current spindle
speed and start the spindle
NO Wearing process begins. The NO NO
machine tool moves from
Increase the spindle speed machine origin to wearing end
every certain interval until it point back and forth once.
reaches the maximal speed
NO

Whether wear times is enough

Whether wear process ends

YES YES
Preheat ends. Turn off the
spindle. Restore the spindle Wear process ends
speed and turn off coolant.

Preheat process ends Wear process ends

Preheat and wear processes end

Fig. 3-20 Flow Chart of Preheat and Wear Function

In the whole preheat and wear process, the system is in running state. You can stop the process by
pressing key ―Stop‖ or ―E-stop‖ manually. For example, when the spindle is being preheated and the
machine tool is running, you can press key ―Stop‖ or ―E-stop‖ to stop the preheating. When preheating
process stops, the system will restore the speed of the spindle to that before preheating, close and cool
the spindle.

「54」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

CAUTION
1) If the machine tool stops manually or because of other conditions such as external warning or limits during
preheating and wearing, the preheat and weare process will end.
2) If the wear process ends earlier than preheat process does, the preheat process will end although the spindle
speed has not reached the maximum.
3) If the preheat process ends earlier than wear process does, the spindle speed will remain the maximum until
wear process end.
4) Turn on the output port which controls the switch of lubricate pump. And the lubrication duration is the value
of parameter N41002 “Lubricate Duration”.

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

Whether spindle warm-up and crew
Warm-up and trial-run operation will be enabled after YES: Open
N78000
trial-run switch all axes have returned to the machine NO: Close
origin.
The switch to turn on spindle warm-up YES: Open
N78001 Warm-up switch
function. NO: Close
The switch to turn on screw trial-run YES: Open
N78002 Trial-run switch
function. NO: Close
Coolant On during During spindle warming up, turn on the YES: Open
N78100
warming up coolant. NO: Close
0~the maximal
Warm-up startup The startup spindle speed (RPM)
N78110 warm-up startup
speed during warming up process.
speed
Warm-up max. The maximal spindle speed (RPM)
N78111 0~24000
speed during warming up process.
The spindle speed increased every
Spindle speed
N78112 specified time period warming up 0~24000
increment
process.
Spindle speed During warming up, spindle speed will
N78113 1~60
increase interval. be increased after this interval.
Lubrication On Turn on lubrication during screw YES: Turn on
N78200
during trial run. trial-run process. NO: Turn off
It is the time interval between two
N41001 Lubricating Interval 1~1000000
start-ups of lubrication pump.
It is the filling time of lubrication pump
N41002 Lubricating Duration 1~100
each time.
Machine coordinates of end position
N78210 Trial-run end -99999~100000
during screw trial-run process.

Software Operation「55」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

Repeated times from the machine
N78220 Trial-run times 1~1000
origin to end position.
Moving speed of axis during screw
N78221 Trial-run speed 0~100000
trial-run process.

3.8 Spindle Parameter Adjustment

In auto mode, press to enter the interface as shown in Fig. 3-21, in which spindle speed can be
set directly.

Fig. 3-21 Spindle Speed Setting

Spindle speed can be directly set in the parameter setting area above the manipulation button bar. When
parameter N72002 ―Ignore Programmed Spindlerate‖ is set to ―YES‖, spindle speed in auto machining
will adopt the system setting value, i.e. the value of ―Prog.S‖; when set to ―NO‖, spindle speed in auto
machining will adopt the specified spindle speed in the machining file.
There are two ways for changing parameters under [Coordinate-auto screen]:
1) Press ―↑‖, ―↓‖, ―→‖ or ―←‖ to move the cursor onto the desired parameter, and then press ―Enter‖
to eject an input box.
2) Press the corresponding shortcut key to eject an input box. For instance, for ―Prog.S(S)‖, pressing
the letter key ―S‖ on the operation panel will eject an input box for entering a value.
Spindle speed can be controlled by adjusting spindle override. Their relationship is as following:

「56」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Current spindle speed  Spindle speed  Current spindle override

Spindle override knob is on the operation panel, as shown in Fig. 3-22.

100
90 110
80 120

70 130

60 140
50 150

Fig. 3-22 Spindle Override Knob

The least unit of ruler of spindle override is 10% (10% for each scale), with setting range of spindle
override ―50% ~ 150%‖.

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

The max. allowable rotation speed of
N20001 Max Spindle Speed spindle (matched with the inverter 0~999999
setting)
The speed of spindle, which should be 0~Max Spindle
N20002 Spindle Speed
consistent with the setting of inverter. Speed
SpindleCool Off Delay time of closing spindle cooling
N20005 0~600
Delay Time pump after spindle stop
The delayed time before turning on the
Spindle On Delay
N20010 spindle so that it can accelerate to the 0~60
Time
setting speed.
Spindle Off Delay The delayed time before turning off the
N20011 0~60
time spindle so that it can stop completely.
The value of ―Prog.S‖ under [Coordinate-auto] must be less than that of N20001; the max. setting
value of N20001 is corresponding to analog SVC 10V; when the inverter reaches the max. voltage
10V, the corresponding rotary speed of inverter is the max. spindle speed, i.e. the value of N20001.

Current spindle speed

Real - time voltage of analog SVC   10V  Spindle override
N20001
Parameter N20010 and N20011 set the delay time of spindle on/ off, due to a certain time is needed
before spindle reaches rated rotary speed since start-up or stops until reaching zero speed; if
machining begins before the machine reaching rated rotary speed or other operation is executed
before spindle stops completely, it‘s possible to damage the tool or produce a scrap.

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

N72004 Spindle Off when Whether spindle will automatically stop YES: Stop;

Software Operation「57」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

Cycle Stop when machining stops regularly NO: Not stop
Spindle On when Whether spindle will automatically rotate YES: Stop;
N72008
Cycle Start when machining begins NO: Not stop
Stop Spindle on Whether spindle will automatically stop YES: Stop;
N73005
Pause when machining pauses NO: Not stop
This group of parameters sets the spindle action when commands of machining stop/ start/ pause
are executed.

3.9 Tool Measurement

The process of tool measurement refers to the process of establishing the concrete position of
workpiece coordinate system (WCS) in the machine coordinate system (MCS).
When the parameter N11304 ―Encoder Feedback‖ is set to ―Yes‖, tool measurement with encoder
feedback function will be used; while it is set to ―No‖, tool measurement without encoder feedback (or the
traditional one) will be used.
With the help of a tool presetter, tool measurement is realized. As shown in Fig. 3-23, there are ports on
the controller corresponding to CUT and COM on the tool presetter. If necessary, such port as
―Over-travel Protection‖ can be added on the controller according to customers‘ needs. According to the
different installation positions of a tool presetter, tool measurement is divided into mobile calibration and
fixed calibration, first calibration and calibration after tool change.

NC
RED CUT (Tool Presetter signal)

BLACK COM
NC Green (Overtravel protection)

Yellow COM

Fig. 3-23 Electrical Wiring Diagram of A WEIHONG Tool Presetter

Fig. 3-24 is the sketch map of tool calibration using of a tool presetter.

「58」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Mobile Tool Measurement

Fixed Tool Measurement Tool Nose

Thickness
Tool
Presetter

Tool Nose
Thickness

Tool Workpiece
Presetter
Worktable

Fig. 3-24 Sketch Map of Using A Tool Presetter

3.9.1 Software Interface

Press key to access functional area [Machining], and then press F5 to open dialog box ―Fixed
Calibration (Measure Tool Length)‖, as shown in Fig. 3-25. Pressing a shortcut key will select the
corresponding measurement type under this interface.

Fig. 3-25 Dialog Box “Fixed Calibration(Measure Tool Length)”

The default for calibration type is fixed calibration. You can modify parameter N80005 to set the
calibration type according to your needs.

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

N80005 Calibration Type Selection of calibration type. 0; 1; 2
0: Mobile calibration;
1: Fixed calibration;

2: First/Exchanged calibration

The default is 1.

Software Operation「59」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.9.2 Fixed Calibration

Fixed calibration refers to the measurement operation on a certain fixed position of a machine tool. You
can set the fixed presetter position by modifying the value of parameter ―N75210‖.
Due to tool damage or other causes, the length of a tool and the clamping position may vary during
calibration. In this case, you can reconfirm tool offset by fixed calibration. The calibration type is used for
multi-tool mode and mainly used in tool machines with tool magazine. See Fig. 3-26 and Fig. 3-27 for the
sketch map of fixed calibration.

①Automatically locate to the

specified position rapidly

Fix this position according

to the position of tool
presetter.

Position before
②Up and down measurements measurement
Tool
Presetter
Worktable
Fig. 3-26 The Process of Fixed Calibration without Encoder Feedback Function

①Automatically locate to the

specified position rapidly
Fix this position according
to the position of tool
presetter.
②Only once measurement Position before
measurement
Tool
Presetter
Worktable
Fig. 3-27 The Process of Fixed Measurement with Encoder Feedback Function

The process of fixed calibration records the machine coordinate when the tool nose touches the surface
of the tool presetter. Tool offset is set as the recorded machine coordinate.
Tool offset= Machine coordinate

Machine Coordinate
Z=0

Tool Offset

Machine coordinate of
Tool tool presetter surface
Presetter
Worktable

Fig. 3-28 The Sketch Map of Tool Offset

「60」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Press key and F5 to enter dialog box ―Fixed Calibration‖, as shown in Fig. 3-25.
The steps of fixed calibration are as below:
1) Select a tool according to tool No.;
2) Execute fixed calibration to the selected tool and record the tool offset. When tool presetter is
available, press F1 ―Start Calibration‖ to enable auto calibration; while tool presetter is absent in
this step, you can press F5 ―Set Tool Length‖ to manually set the tool offset in Z-axis.
3) Record tool offset values.
4) Execute step 1 and 2 to each tool;
5) Select any tool to move to workpiece surface for clearing.

CAUTION
In fixed calibration, tool offset must be set before moving any tool to workpiece surface for clearing.

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

The speed that the tool moves from the
F in Fixed
N75203 highest point to the calibration-start -
Calibration
point in fixed calibration.
Fixed Presetter The machine coordinates of the fixed
N75210 -99999~99999
Position tool presetter
For other related parameters about fixed calibration, such as N75001, N75002, N75020, N10050 and
N10060, refer to section 3.9.3.

3.9.3 Mobile Calibration

Set the value of parameter N80005 as ―0‖, and press key and F5 to enter dialog box ―Mobile
Calibration‖, as shown below.

Fig. 3-29 Dialog Box “Mobile Calibration”

Mobile calibration can be used to set workpiece origin of Z-axis by executing calibration at the current

Software Operation「61」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

position. After mobile calibration, the system will calculate according to ―Calibration result‖ and set it into
the part offset. The thickness of the mobile presetter is decided by parameter N75100.

Workpiece offset  Machine coordinate -Thickness of tool presetter - Public offset - Tool offset
Generally, the default setting values of public offset and tool offset are both ―0‖.
See Fig. 3-30 and Fig. 3-31 for the sketch map of the process of mobile tool calibration.
①Manually move to the upper
side of tool presetter

Manually move the

machine to this position

Position before
measurement

Tool ②Up and down measurements

Presetter
Workpiece
Worktable
Fig. 3-30 The Process of Mobile Calibration without Encoder Feedback Function

①Manually move to the upper

side of tool presetter

Manually move the

machine to this position

②Only once measurement Position before

measurement

Tool
Presetter
Workpiece
Worktable
Fig. 3-31 The Process of Mobile Calibration with Encoder Feedback Function

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

Mobile Presetter The distance from the surface of
N75100 0~1000
Thickness mobile presetter to WCS Z0.
The measurement method of this parameter is as follows:
1) Manually move Z-axis to a certain point over workpiece surface→ shift down the tool nose until
reaching workpiece surface→ record the current coordinate of Z-axis (Z1).
2) Uplift Z-axis→ put a tool presetter on workpiece surface→ shift down Z-axis slowly until
reaching the presetter and getting the tool presetter signal→ record the current coordinate of
Z-axis (Z2).
3) Z2- Z1, and its result equals to the thickness of the tool presetter. Manually enter this result into
parameter N75100.

「62」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

F in Precise Tool speed when approaching the
N75001 -
Probing presetter surface in tool measurement
The times of repeated up & down
measurements after receiving tool
Precise Probing
N75002 presetter signal when the tool -
Duration
approaches the presetter surface in
tool measurement
The max. allowable error value of tool
ToolMea Result
N75020 measurement in multiple tool 0~10
Tolerance
measurements
ToolMea The PLC address of input on I/O
N75024 Overtravel Port board, which system gets overtravel -
Addr signal from the presetter.
ToolMea Alarm will occur when overtravel in YES: Enable;
N75025
Overtravel Alarm tool calibration. NO: Disable
Positive
Machine coordinate of upper limit of
N10050 ToolMeas. -99999~99999
worktable range in tool measurement
Travel Limits
Negative
Machine coordinate of lower limit of
N10060 ToolMeas. -99999~99999
worktable range in tool measurement
Travel Limits
Parameter N75020 refers to the max. allowable error of tool measurement set in the system,
relative to the average error value of repeated tool measurements in the process of measurement; if
average error value is less than N75020, tool measurement succeeds, or measurement fails.

3.9.4 First-time Calibration/Calibration after Tool Changed

Set the value of parameter N80005 as ―2‖, and press key and then F5 to enter dialog box ―First
Calibration/Calibration after Tool Changed‖. The calibration will generate a new part offset value
according to the former one and the ―Deviation value‖.

Software Operation「63」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-32 Dialog Box “First Calibration/Calibration after Tool Changed”

The operation steps are as below:

1) Firstly, manually move Z-axis to workpiece surface, and then confirm workpiece origin by mobile
calibration or manual clearing. To clear manually, press key 1 to enter functional area [Advance],
and press F4 ―Clear Z‖ in interface 「Coor Manager(1)」.
2) Secondly, in interface 「Coor(1)」 under functional area [Machining], press F5 to open dialog box
―First Calibration/Calibration after Tool Changed‖, and then press F1 to start the calibration. The
system will automatically record the current machine coordinate of Z-axis. The process is
automatically completed by the system, as shown in Fig. 3-33.

Top
Up to the top of Z axis

Up to the top of Z axis

Back to upper side of 6
workpiece origin

2 To machine coordinate of tool presetter 3

To tool presetter

1 Workpiece Origin
Record current Z axis
machine coordinate 5
4
Up 1mm

Fig. 3-33 First-time Calibration

3) Start machining after first-time calibration completed.

4) After tool change or tool break, press ―F3‖ to execute calibration after tool changed. The process is
automatically completed by the system, shown as Fig. 3-34.

「64」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Top

To the top of Z axis

Back to upper side of 6

To the top of Z axis

workpiece origin

2 To machine coordinate of tool presetter 3

To tool presetter
1 Workpiece Origin
Restore current Z axis
workpiece coordinate 5
4
Up 1mm

Fig. 3-34 Calibration after Tool Changed

5) Start machining after process ―Calibration after Tool changed‖ is completed.

CAUTION
“Calibration after Tool Changed” must be executed after completion of “First-time Calibration”.

3.10 Offset Setting of Workpiece Coordinate

System

3.10.1 Workpiece Coordinate System

In programming, programmers select a certain given point on workpiece as origin (also called program
origin) to establish a new coordinate system (i.e. workpiece coordinate system), also a set of right-hand
coordinate system. The origin of WCS, i.e. workpiece origin, is fixed relative to a certain point on
workpiece and mobile relative to machine origin. The selection of origin of WCS should meet the
conditions of simple programming, simple dimensional conversion, and small caused machining error,
etc.
The corresponding coordinate systems of work offset are G55, G56, G57, G58, G59 and G54 (the
default coordination system). And the relationship of work offset and machine coordinate system is as
shown in Fig. 3-35.

Software Operation「65」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

G54(X)
Machine Origin

G54(Y)
Workpiece
Workpiece
Origin

Limit of axial motion

Fig. 3-35 The Relationship of Work Offset and Machine Coordinate System

One, two or multi-work offset can be used in machining program. As shown in Fig. 3-36, if three
workpieces are installed on the worktable, then each workpiece holds a workpiece origin relative to G
code of WCS. The programming example is as follows: drill one hole on each of the three workpieces,
with calculation height Z-0.14.
G56(X)
G55(X)
G54(X) Machine
Origin

G54(Y)
G56(Y)
G55(Y)
Workpiece
Workpiece

Workpiece

Fig. 3-36 Sketch Map

O1801
N1 G20
N2 G17 G40 G80
N3 G90 G54 G00 X5.5 Y3.1 S1000 M03 （Select G54）
N4 G43 Z0.1 H01 M08
N5 G99 G82 R0.1 Z-0.14 P100 F8.0
N6 G55 X5.5 Y3.1 (Switch to G55)
N7 G56 X5.5 Y3.1 (Switch to G56)
N8 G80 Z1.0 M09
N9 G91 G54 G28 Z0 M05 (Switch to G54)

「66」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

N10 M01
…
Program segments N3 ~ N5, within WCS of G54, are related to the first workpiece; Segment N6 will drill
the hole on the second workpiece of the same batch in WCS of G55, while segment N7 will drill the hole
on the third workpiece of the same batch in WCS of G56.
Aiming at all WCSs, public offset is used for adjusting workpiece origin of X-, Y-, and Z-axis, but will not
change the offset value of ―G54 ~G59‖.
The related formula of work offset, tool offset and public offset is as below:
Workpiece coordinate= Machine coordinate – Work offset - Tool offset – Public offset

3.10.2 Extended Coordinate System

With up to 120 extended coordinate systems (also known as additional coordinate systems) provided,
the total number of WCS is 126 (6+120) in NK300CX system. With the value of parameter N80010 set
as ―YES‘, 126 work offsets can be programmed. The extended coordinate systems are the extension for
G54, from G54P0 to G54P119. To view or change the setting of these systems, ―PgUp‖ and ―PgDn‖ are
used for page turning while ―Home‖ and ―End‖ for page heading and page footing.
Command G54 Px: Select an extended coordinate system, and ―x‖ here refers to a number within [0,
119].
Example:
G54 P0 Select extended coordinate system 1
G54 P1 Select extended coordinate system 2
G54 P2 Select extended coordinate system 3
G54 Px Select extended coordinate system (x+1)
G54 P119 Select extended coordinate system 120

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

Show coordinate system page
Support Extension which contain 120 groups extra-Part YES: Support;
N80010
Part Offsets offsets under the advanced NO: Not support
function.
The default parameter setting is ―NO‖. When above 6 parts are clamped on a worktable, set this
parameter to ―YES‖ to support the extended coordinate systems of work offset, so as to save
multiple groups of part offsets, which is user-friendly.

3.10.3 Software Interface

Press key and then key ―1‖ to access coordinate system management interface, as shown in

Software Operation「67」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-37. This interface displays currently being edited WCS and its corresponding work offset and
public offset.

Fig. 3-37 Coordinate System Management Interface

Press the arrow keys to move cursor onto ―Part offset‖, or to ―Public offset‖, and then press key ―Enter‖ to
modify the part offset or public offset. Or you can press F7 ―Down‖ or F8 ―Up‖ to modify the public offset
of Z-axis. ―Part Offset‖ and ―Public Offset‖ can only be modified when the boxes before ―Modify (T)‖ and
―Modify (H)‖ are selected.

CAUTION
1) Switchover Coordinate Systems. In interface 「Coor Manager(1)」, press key “←” or “→” to move the curser
to the a coordinate column, whose color will change into light blue. Then press F1 to select the coodinate
system, the name of the system such as “G54” will be highlighted. Swtichover is completed.
2) When G54 is set as the current coordinate system, “G54” will not show on the interface 「Coor(1)」 under
functional area [Machining] and 「Coor Manager(1)」 under functional area [Advance].
3) When any other coordinate system except G54 is set as the current coordinate system, the name of the system
will show on the interface 「Coor(1)」 under functional area [Machining] and 「Coor Manager(1)」 under
functional area[Advance]. For example, if G55 is set as the current coordinate system, “G55”will show on
the interfaces.
4) When the value of parameter N80010 “Support Extended Part Offsets” is set as “YES”, a tip “‟Z-up‟ and
„Z-down‟ operations only influence the public offset value of Z-axis” will show beside the public offset in
interface 「Coor Manager(1)」.
 Clear X, Clear Y, Clear Z
Press F2/F3/F4 to set the value of current machine coordinate of X/Y/Z as the part offset, while the
corresponding machine coordinate will not change.
 Down
Press F7 and an input box will pop up. You can input the adjustment of Z-axis in the box and press key
―Enter‖. The workpiece origin on Z-axis will move down a specified distance.

「68」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

 Up
Press F8 and an input box will pop up. You can input the t the adjustment of Z-axis in the box and press
key ―Enter‖. The workpiece origin on Z-axis will move up specified distance.
Both ―Up‖ and ―Down‖ only modify public offset of Z-axis.
 Coordinate Backup

Press key to turn to the next buttons bar. Then press F1 to open coordinate backup sub-screen,
as shown in Fig. 3-38. You can save the current part offsets into the system by pressing key ―↑‖ and ―↓‖
to select the directory you will save the part offset and F1 to confirm the saving.

Fig. 3-38 Coordinate Backup

With part offsets saved before, anytime a new machining program file has been loaded, you can press
arrow keys ―↑‖ ―↓‖ to select the desired offset and press F2 to restore the offsets into the current WCS,
as shown in Fig. 3-39. Press F7 to confirm the loading and F8 to cancel the loading.
Furthermore, after you choose to restore and load the offsets, a new dialog box will show up, asking
whether to change Z offset too, as shown in Fig. 3-40. If you select ―Yes‖, Z-axis offset will be changed. If
you select ―No‖, offsets of axes except Z-axis will restore.
After you select ―Yes‖ of ―No‖, another dialog box will pop up, asking whether to change public offset, as
shown in Fig. 3-41.

Fig. 3-39 Work Offset Restore Prompt

Fig. 3-40 Prompt to Change Z Offset or not

Software Operation「69」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-41 Prompt to Change Public Offset or not

Press F7 to confirm and back to the upper level interface.

CAUTION
Ten sets of part offsets can be backuped in the system. You can save the current part offsets into the system by
pressing key “↑” and “↓” to select the directory you will save the current part offset. The default place is the
first line. If there is already a part offset, the newly saved part offset will replace the original one.

3.11 Centering
Centering must be proceeded in handwheel mode.
The system supports manual centering. Manual centering is divided into ―Manual Center (two-point
centering) and ―Circle Center‖. An edge finder can be used for accurate centering.
When press ―F6 ENBL Edge Finder‖ to make it turn to blue and start spindle, spindle speed decided by
the parameter ―N20006 Spindle Speed when Centering‖, whose value is 500 by default and should not
be set too large.
When ―F7 ENBL Edge Finder‖ is not available in manual centering, turn on spindle, press ―Spindle CW‖
or ―Spindle CCW‖ at spindle speed set in the software.

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

Spindle speed when ―Centering‖,
0~The maximal spindle
N20006 S in Centering which must be consistent with the
speed
setting of spindle transducer.

3.11.1 Line Centering

Line centering refers to the process of locating the midpoint of a line connected by two points, mainly
used for locating the center of a blank and set it as the workpiece origin.

In manual mode, press key to and key ―1‖ to enter interface 「Coor(1)」. Then press F2 to open
dialog box ―Line Centering‖, as shown in Fig. 3-42.

「70」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-42 Dialog Box “Line Centering”

In this interface, you can press key ―Select‖ to choose a coordinate system and set the spindle speed in
centering.
The operation steps of line centering are as below (An example of X-axis):
1) In HW mode, manually move the cutter to one side of workpiece, and then press F1 [Record X1] to
record the machine coordinate of current point.
2) Move the cutter to the other side of workpiece, and then press F2 [Centering in X] to calculate the
midpoint coordinate based on the coordinate of current position and last recorded value and set it as
workpiece origin.

3.11.2 Circle Centering

Circle centering, means automatic calculation of center point coordinates (generally set as workpiece
origin) of a circular blank in terms of the three recorded circle coordinates.

In manual mode, press key , ―1‖ and then F3 to open the Dialog Box ―Circle Centering‖, as
shown in Fig. 3-43.

Fig. 3-43 Dialog Box “Circle Centering”

The steps of circle centering are as below:

1) Manually move the cutter to one point on the circumference of a circular blank, and then press F1
[Record P1] to record the machine coordinates of current point as the first group of coordinate;
2) Move the cutter to another point on the circumference, and then press F2 [Record P2] to record the
machine coordinates of current point as the second group of coordinate;
3) Move the cutter to the third point on the circumference, and then press F3 [Circle Centering] to
calculate the circle center coordinates and set it as workpiece origin based on the current machine

Software Operation「71」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

coordinates and the two groups of coordinate recorded previously.

CAUTION

1) When using extended coordinate system, by pressing key “Select”, you can only select coordinate system
G54~G50 and the current extended coordinate system. If you need to use other coordinate systems, you can
set it in interface 「Coor Manager(1)」.
2) When setting “S in Centering” in a centering dialog box, the modified value will be effective the moment the
curser leaves the input box.
3) When executing centering on an axis, the other axes should remain static. For example, the position of Y-axis
should remain unchanged when centering is executed on X-axis.

3.12 Adjustment of Velocity & Acceleration

3.12.1 Feedrate Setting

Feedrate (feed speed) can be set directly in the system interface, as shown in Fig. 3-44.

Fig. 3-44 Parameters Setting Zone-feedrate Setting

In auto mode, press key to access interface 「Coor(1)」. Feedrate can be directly set in the
parameter setting zone above the manipulation button bar, as shown in Fig. 3-44. When the parameter
N72001 ―Ignore Programmed Feedrate‖ is set to ―YES‖, the system will adopt feedrate set in the system,
i.e. the value of ―Prog.F‖. When set to ―NO‖, the system will adopt the feedrate specified in the machining
file.

「72」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

There are two methods to select and set a parameter:

1) Press ―↑‖ or ―↓‖ to move cursor to the corresponding parameter, and then press Enter to eject an
input box.
2) Press the corresponding shortcut key behind the desired parameter to eject an input box. Take
―Prog.F(F)‖ as an example, pressing ―F‖ will eject an input box for entering the desired value.
Feedrate is also related with current feedrate override, so it can be controlled by adjusting the current
feedrate override, and the formula is as below:
Current Feedrate  Setting Feedrate  Current Feedrate Override
Feedrate override knob is on the operation panel, as shown in Fig. 3-45.

30 40 50 60
20 70
10 80
5 90
2 100
1 110
0 120

Fig. 3-45 Feedrate Override Knob

The adjusting range of feedrate override is ―0% ~ 120%‖.

3.12.2 G00 Speed Setting

G00 speed refers to the running speed of a machine tool under G00 command.
When the parameter N72003 ―Fix Traverse Rate Override‖ is set to ―YES‖, the running speed of a
machine tool under G00 command is fixed, i.e. the value of ―G00 F‖;
When set to “NO‖, the running speed of a machine tool under G00 command varies with the setting of
feedrate override knob.
Similar to feedrate, G00 speed can also be set directly in the system interface.
The concrete setting method is the same as that of feedrate.

3.12.3 Jog Speed/ Rapid Jog Speed

In manual-jog mode, press key to access the interface 「Coor(1)」. ―Manual Low Speed‖ (jog
speed) and ―Manual High Speed‖ (rapid jog speed) can be set directly in the parameter setting zone
above the manipulation button bar. See Fig. 3-46.

Software Operation「73」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-46 Setting of Jog Speed and Rapid Jog Speed

The concrete setting method is the same as that of feedrate.

3.12.4 Parameter Specification

Except for feedrate and G00 speed, the other involved parameters can be divided into following 5 types:
velocity, acceleration, reference circle & circular speed limit, interpolation algorithm, and smooth setting.

1) Speed

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

The max. achievable speed of a
N64000 Startup Speed stepping motor in startup without 0~600
acceleration
The max. speed of a machine tool in
N64060 Max Feedrate 0~100000
machining
N71000 Slow Jog F There are two kinds of speed for 0 ~ Rapid Jog Speed
option under manual mode: jog
speed (Slow Jog Speed) and rapid Slow Jog Speed~N13000
jog speed, which can be switched Max Feedrate of each axis
by pressing the acceleration key on (Note: The maximal
N71001 Rapid Jog F
the operation panel. The system federate supported by
default running speed mode is jog hardware is
speed. 60000mm/min.)

「74」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

Jog Max. F before The maximum federate before
N71002 Returning to REF returning to the REF point in jog 0~3000mm/min
point. mode.
Parameter N64000 ―startup speed‖ applies to the startup frequency of a stepping & a servo driver,
zero in default setting of driver. The startup frequency refers to the highest frequency of direct
working startup without acceleration of motor.
Reasonable setting of this parameter will improve machining efficiency, and avoid low speed
segment with bad motion feature of motor. ―Startup frequency‖ is generally included in the
ex-factory parameters, but after installation, it will vary, especially in loading motion, thus, it should
be set based on the actual measurement of motor power and inertia of a machine tool.
Parameter confirmation method: set a lower value at first, and repeatedly make the machine
execute typical motion & multi-axis synchronization motion, and then gradually increase this value
until fixing the max. startup speed. The actual setting value of this parameter is half of the max.
startup speed, with general setting range ―300 ~ 400‖.

2) Acceleration

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

Rapid Motion Axial The max. acceleration of each feed
N64101 0.001~100000
Acceleration axis in machine positioning
N64102 Z-axis Acceleration The max. acceleration of Z-axis 0.001~100000
Speed Up
N64103 Acceleration during speed up 0.001~100000
Acceleration
Speed Down
N64104 Deceleration during speed down 0.001~100000
Deceleration
Acceleration for The max. acceleration of feed
N64120 0.001~100000
Corners motion on adjacent axes
The change rate of acceleration of a
N64150 Axial Jerk single axis (acceleration‘s 0.001~1e+011
acceleration)
The larger the value is, the
Acc or Dec Time smoother the speed will be. This
N64204 0~99999
after Interpolation parameter has no effect on track
precision.
―Acceleration for Corners‖ refers to the max. Acceleration of feed motion on adjacent axes, and ―1
~2‖ times of ―Axis Acceleration‖ is recommended, generally within ―1200 ~ 5000‖. For higher speed
requirement, ―2 ~ 4‖ times of ―Axis Acceleration‖ is recommended.
―Axial Jerk‖ refers to growth rate of acceleration, i.e. the increment of acceleration in unit time, with
unit ―mm/s3‖. It is available for S_type and LEP_type acceleration & deceleration, used to mitigate

Software Operation「75」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

the bad effect caused by abrupt acceleration & deceleration of a machine.

3) Reference Circle and Circular Speed Limit

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

Only when this parameter is set to
YES: Valid
N64207 Arc Velocity Limit ―YES‖ do N64208 and N64209
NO: Invalid
work.
Reference circle is the reference of
a machine in processing a circular
workpiece. The max. speed of
MAX Velocity of
N64208 reference circle refers to the max. 0.001~100000
REF Circle
allowable speed of a machine in
processing this circle without strong
vibration.
MIN velocity of Limit circular motion speed to avoid
N64209 0.001~100000
REF Circle too low speed
After installation of a machine completed, you can make the machine process a circle, in which
vibration will occur due to centrifugal force. The higher the speed is, the stronger the vibration will
be. Gradually increase the feed speed to see the state of vibration of the machine tool until the max.
circular speed is achieved, i.e. the max. allowable speed of the machine tool without strong
vibration. This circle is regarded as the reference circle, and its max. allowable speed is the max.
speed of reference circle. Encountering other circles in machining, the system will calculate their
max. centripetal acceleration in terms of the reference circle and its max speed to ensure the
centrifugal force is within the debugging value, i.e. the vibration will not be stronger than that during
ex-factory debugging.
In processing a circle with small radius, even quite low feed speed of the circle will generate very
high centripetal acceleration, thus the machining speed will be quite low caused by circle speed
limit to limit the centripetal acceleration. To ensure machining efficiency, when the speed calculated
by the system is lower than the setting value of N64209, the setting value of N64209 will be adopted
in machining.

4) Interpolation Algorithm

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

Select the most suitable 0: Trapezoid algorithm;
Path Interpolation
N64203 interpolation algorithm to reduce 1: S_type algorithm;
Algorithm
error after debugging. 2: LEP algorithm;

「76」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

3: Acceleration trapezoid
algorithm
MIN Velocity in The min. velocity in LEP algorithm
N64205 0~100000
LEP interpolation
N64203 is used for algorithm selection. The system currently supports trapezoid, S_type, LEP,
acceleration trapezoid algorithms. Among them, trapezoid algorithm & S_type algorithm hold the
highest efficiency, while LEP algorithm holds the highest machining quality in three-dimensional
machining.
“Acceleration Trapezoid Algorithm‖ means acceleration curve is a trapezoid. The relationship of
acceleration and time: accelerate to the max. acceleration at ―axial jerk‖, then keep this acceleration
constant, and then decelerate to ―0‖ at ―axial jerk‖. Generally, if this algorithm is used, N64150 ―axial
jerk‖ can be set within ―100000 ~ 200000‖ (mm/s3). The flexibility of acceleration and deceleration
in this algorithm is better.

5) Smooth Setting

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

During machining, because of
different inertia of each axis, the
servo system may meet lag
Delay for Exact phenomenon at sharp turning
N63002 0.0~999
Stop corners. This parameter is used to
overcome the lag phenomenon
produced by the servo system by
setting an extra stop time.
The larger the value of the parameter
is, the smoother the workpiece
surface will be. But if the value of the
Path Smoothing parameter is too large, it will affect
N63006 0.0~0.064
Time the dimension of the workpiece. For
a mold machine, it generally should
be within 0.01, for a woodworking
machine, within 0.03.
If set to ―NO‖, each motion
instruction starts and ends at zero
speed. If set to ―YES‖, the system
Smoothing the Path YES: Valid;
N64200 will set a proper start speed and end
Velocity NO: Invalid
speed for each motion instruction
according to the specific tool path to
ensure smoothness of high speed

Software Operation「77」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

machining.
The machine tool will move at the
startup speed with the speed instead
of ―Smoothing the path velocity‖, if
MAX Angle Smooth
N64201 path corner angle is greater than 0~180
Velocity
MAX angle. The system will do
―Smoothing the path velocity‖ if path
corner angle is less than MAX angle.
Whether to decelerate when the
Decelerate at Max YES: Valid;
N64241 connection angle is approaching its
Connect Angle NO: Invalid
max. value
Prepared number
Segments for performance
of path for
N64245 optimization, having no effect on the 1~2000
optimizing
result of velocity planning.
performance
Slide speed for Eliminating velocity fluctuation when YES: Valid
N64246
small lines machining short segments. NO: Invalid
Reference length of Segments shorter than the value of
slide speed for this parameter will be executed 0.001~10
small lines speed smoothing.
In machining an arc (or other curves) composed of short segments, velocity fluctuation,
like frequent acceleration and deceleration obvious in our S-type algorithm, will occur at
places where curvature is relatively large, as follows:

Assume that each segments is very short, and the curvature from A to B is large, the
actual velocity planning will probably be as follows:
N64247

The above velocity curve (acceleration→ deceleration→ acceleration„) will lead to

oscillation of a machine tool. At this time, the parameter “Slide speed for small lines”
should be set to “YES”, and the value of the parameter “Reference length of slide
speed for small lines‖ should be set larger than the length of short segments in the tool
path. When the short segments in the tool path are shorter than the reference length, the
velocity will be executed smooth treatment. Otherwise, there is no treatment. The
velocity after treatment is as follows:

「78」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

In this way, frequent acceleration and deceleration is avoided, oscillation of a machine

tool is eliminated, and machining quality is improved.
With the function, moving speed of
Velocity Smooth for YES: Enable;
N64249 single axis will be restricted in order
Single Axis NO: Disable
to get more smooth speed.

3.13 Simulation & Track

3.13.1 Simulation
The function of simulation provides a fast but lifelike simulation machining environment.
Running under the simulation mode, the system will not drive a machine tool to do the relative actions
but only show the moving track of the cutter at high speed in the track window. By simulation, you can
see the moving form of the machine tool in advance, avoiding machine tool damage due to programming
mistakes in the machining file. And you can also learn other additional information.

Press key to access functional area [Program], and load a machining file into the system. Press

key , ―2‖, and then F1 to start simulation. Operation bar ―Simulate‖ will appear, as shown in Fig.
3-47. You can see the whole machining track in the track window. During normal machining, you can
read the completion information of machining file and program information on the right of the track
window. Operation bar ―Simulate‖ can help you control the simulation process and simulation track
freely.

Software Operation「79」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-47 Simulation and Track Window

3.13.2 Motion Track

The track window displays the moving track of the cutter in real time. 3D display enables that you can
view the tool path more intuitionally so as to ensure the accuracy of the loaded machining file. In the 3D
tracking mode, abundant operation methods are offered by the system for the convenience of viewing
the motion track from different perspectives and in an appropriate scaling.
By pressing F2 in the interface 「Machining(2)」, you can see the pop-up ―Adjust Graphic‖ window, as
shown in Fig. 3-48. Travel limits of the workbench will show on the window as system default. You can
press the displayed shortcut keys to switch view, zoom in and out machining track, and show current
point, fit to window, load and clear tracks. You can freely view the machining track and machining state.

「80」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-48 Adjust Graphic

3.13.3 Machining Statistics

As shown in Fig. 3-49, press F3 ―Statistics‖ to open the dialog box. This dialog box mainly displays
statistics info of all the current processing and previously processed machining files. See Fig. 3-49. The
statistics info shown in the dialog box includes such as number, program name, initial time, run time,
total length and part counter. A maximal of 21 machining files can be saved in this dialog box. And the
continuous machining records of a same file only record one line of file information.

Fig. 3-49 Dialog Box “Statistics”

Press F1 to clear all the history statistics in the list.

Press F7 to exit the dialog box ―Statistics‖.

Software Operation「81」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.13.4 Parameter Specification

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

It sets whether the system will analyze the
NO: Not analyze
N81000 Auto Load Graph machining track automatically after a
YES: Analyze
machining file is loaded.
It sets the file size limit in auto track
loading. Only when the file size is smaller
N81001 Max File Size than or equal to this value can its track be 0~100000
loaded automatically, i.e. ―Auto Load
Graph‖ works.
Setting whether to use gradient color fill in NO: Not use
N81010 Gradient Fill
the track window YES: Use
Setting whether to draw the boarder of the NO: Not draw
N81011 Draw Workbench
worktable in the track window YES: Draw
Setting whether to use 2D mode to view NO: Not use
N81012 2D Mode
the track in the track window YES: Use
Setting whether to clear the contents of the NO: Not clear
N81015 Clear on Loading
current view when a new file is loaded YES: Clear
Setting whether to display workpiece origin NO: Not display
N81016 Draw WC Origin
in the track window YES: Display
Setting whether to display machine origin NO: Not display
N81017 Draw MC Origin
in the track window YES: Display
Setting the background color for the track
N81018 Bkground Color 1 Select a color
window
Setting the background color for the track
N81019 Bkground Color 2 Select a color
window
N81020 Setting the color for motion track
G00/G01/G02/G03
~ commanded by G00/G01/G02/G03 when Select a color
Color (running)
N81023 running
N81032 Setting the color for motion track
G00/G01/G02/G03
~ commanded by G00/G01/G02/G03 when Select a color
Color (loading)
N81035 loading
N81045 Grid Color Setting grid color in the track window Select a color
Setting coordinate color in the track
N81046 Coordinate Color Select a color
window
Setting a color for workpiece origin in the
N81049 WC Origin Color Select a color
track window
Setting a color for machine origin in the
N81050 MC Origin Color Select a color
track window

「82」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.14 Compensation
There are four types of compensation in the system, i.e. tool compensation, part compensation, screw
error compensation and across quadrant compensation. The principles and operation interface of the
different types of compensation are introduced in the following content.

3.14.1 Tool Compensation

In CNC machining, the CNC system actually controls the tool center or the related point of the tool rest
whose motion track is controlled directly to realize profile processing for the actual parts.
The cutting part actually used is the tool nose or the cutting edge which has dimensional variation with
the tool center or the related point of the tool rest, so the CNC system has to compute the corresponding
coordinates of the tool center or the related point of the tool rest according to the actual coordinate
position of the tool rest or the cutting edge (namely the actual coordinate position of the part profile),
which is called tool compensation.
Input the new tool parameter values in the tool compensation interface if the tool nose radius is altered
due to tool wear, tool sharpening or tool change, avoiding the trouble to modify the programmed
machining file.

Press the advanced function selection key and key ―2‖ to access interface 「Tool Manager(2)」,
as shown in Fig. 3-50. Detailed tool information is shown on the interface, including No., name, diameter,
dia. wear, length, len wear. wear, and offsets in different axes. Press F1 to set the tool capacity, i.e. the
maximal number of tools. Currently, the system supports a maximum of 255 tools.

Fig. 3-50 The Interface of Tool Manager

To make tool compensation (including tool radius compensation and tool length compensation) effective,
parameter ―N62410 Enable Cutter Compensation‖ should be set to ―YES‖. G43 (positive offset) and G44

Software Operation「83」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

(negative offset) are used for tool diameter compensation while G41 and G42 for tool radius
compensation. And G40(cancel tool radius compensation) and G49(cancel tool diameter compensation).
The commands above must be used together with G00/G0a to make tool compensation.

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

Enable Cutter Setting whether to perform tool YES: Valid
N62410
Compensation compensation NO: Invalid
Cutter 1: Normal type
The type to establish and cancel
N62411 Compensation 2: Intersect type
cutter compensation
Type 3: Insert type
Cutter 0: No tool compensation
Specifying the direction of tool
N62412 Compensation 1: Left compensation
compensation
Direction 2: Right compensation
Num of Intervene
See below for explanation. 1~5
Detected Graphics
Interference here refers to over-cut caused by too large tool radius. Parameter N62413
N62413 decides interference detection among how many adjacent shapes. When interference
phenomena detected, an interference alarm will be given. Generally, setting a smaller
tool diameter will relieve the alarm. Note the default value of this parameter is 3. When
set to 1, there is no interference detection and alarm.
If it is set to ―YES‖, when parameter
―Enable Cutter Compensation‖ is set
to ―YES‖, translation of an ENG file
calls codes about tool length
compensation or tool radius
Force to Use Tool compensation; if it is set to ―NO‖, YES: Force to use
N65206
Compensation even though parameter ―Enable NO: Not force to use
Cutter Compensation‖ is set to ―YES‖,
translation of an ENG file does not
call codes about tool length
compensation or tool radius
compensation.

3.14.1.1 Tool Radius Compensation (G40~G42)

Tool radius compensation code, namely from G40 to G42, can make the tool moved by the offset value,
see in Fig. 3-51.
To make the offset value is the same with the tool radius value, the system will firstly create an offset
vector (known as ―Starting‖), whose length equals to radius of the tool.
Direction of the offset vector is perpendicular to the forward direction of the tool, looking into the tool
center from the workpiece. If linear interpolation or circular interpolation is called after ―Starting‖, the
system will contour with the tool moved by the offset, namely, with the tool compensated by radius value.

「84」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

To end the compensation and make the tool return to the starting point, tool radius compensation code
will be canceled and disabled.

Workpiece

Cancel tool
radius
compensation
“Starting”

Fig. 3-51 Schematic Diagram for Tool Radius Compensation

3.14.1.2 Tool Compensation Type

Tool compensation should be established before executed, and cancelled after workpiece machining
completed. To establish tool compensation is moving the tool to the edge of workpiece in a reasonable
way, while to cancel tool compensation is moving the tool to the specified point from the edge of
workpiece.
Generally speaking, tool compensation establishment consists of two segments, see segment 1 and
segment 2 in Fig. 3-52. The software offers 3 ways to establish and cancel the tool compensation:
1) Normal type: the programming path is translated by 90 degrees to get the segment 2 for
establishment, next, make the starting point of segment 2 the end point of the segment 1. Segment
1 and 2 constitute the tool nose path with tool radius compensated. Please note that this type is not
available to arc command.
2) Intersect type: the programming path is translated in parallel to get the segment 2 for establishment,
next, make the starting point of segment 2 the end point of the segment 1. Segment 1 and 2
constitute the tool nose path with tool radius compensated. Please note that this type is not
available to arc command.
3) Insert type: after the programming path is translated, figure out the intersection point of segment 1
and 2. Insert a line from the starting point of segment 1 before translation and the starting point of
segment 1 after translation, to get the tool nose path. It is available to arc command as well, but
machining efficiency will be affected since an extra segment needs to be completed.

Software Operation「85」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

2 2 2

Tool Center Tool Center Tool Center

Path Path Path
1 1
1
Programmed Programmed Programmed
Path Path Path

Normal Type Intersect Type Insert Type

Fig. 3-52 Type to Establish Tool Compensation

3.14.1.3 Tool Compensation Direction

The schematic diagram of tool compensation direction is as shown in Fig. 3-53.

Tool Rotary Tool Rotary

Direction Direction
Tool Tool
Heading Heading
Direction Direction

(a) Left Compensation (b) Right Compensation

Fig. 3-53 Direction of Tool Compensation (A: Left Compensation; B: Right Compensation)

Programming for tool radius compensation is as shown in Fig. 3-54:

Tool, G40

G41

G42

X,Y(10,10)

Center

Fig. 3-54 Schematic Diagram of Tool Compensation Machining

G17 G01 G41(G42) X10 Y10 F1000 D01 ‟linear interpolation and tool radius compensation
G02 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ‟circular interpolation

「86」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Among the above programming, G41 means left compensation, namely the tool will deviate a distance
towards the left side of tool heading direction and this distance is tool radius; G42 means right
compensation, namely the tool will deviate a distance towards the right side of tool heading direction and
this distance is tool radius. X10Y10 is the endpoint coordinates of linear motion. F1000 represents the
tool moves at the speed of 1000. D01 is the parameter of G41/G42, namely the tool compensation
number. From D00 to D07, they have their own corresponding radius compensation value in the tool
compensation table.
For the details of programming of tool compensation instruction, see Programming Manual.

3.14.2 Part Compensation

Press key to enter functional area [Parameter], and then press key ―3‖ to open interface
「Personalized(3)」. Set the value of parameter N80002 as ―YES‖. Restart the software, and press key

to enter functional area [Advance] and then press key ―3‖ to open the interface 「Part Comp(3)」.

The system includes single compensation and array compensation, as shown in Fig. 3-55. In single
compensation, each workpiece is compensated separately, i.e. the compensation offset of each
machining file can be different. In array compensation, the same rows or columns are compensated the
same offset. Taking X01Y01 as an example, it compensates the first rows and columns.

Fig. 3-55 Interface 「Part Comp(3)」

To enable part compensation, set the value of parameter N80002 as ―YES‖. Otherwise, interface 「Part
Comp」 will not show on the functional area [Advance].
Set Source File (N): load the desired single workpiece file into the system firstly, and then turn to this
interface and press ―Set Source File (N)‖ to load the file for work compensation. Otherwise, a prompt ―No
File!‖ will pop up, as shown in Fig. 3-56.

Software Operation「87」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-56 Source File Error Prompt

After manually entering workpiece size (X size and Y size), rows (CountRow), columns (CountCol), row
space (SpaceRow) and column space (SpaceCol), set machining direction and order to determine
machining sequence of each workpiece, then enter the compensation offset for each workpiece, and
then press F3 ―Generate‖ to generate a multi-workpiece file. Enter the file name, and then press Enter to
load the file into the system automatically. The new file is saved to ―D:\NcFiles‖.

CAUTION
1) After the file is loaded for work compensation, the source file in the system will be deleted automatically,
since the final machining file loaded into the system will be the compensation file newly generated.
2) G28, G29, G65, G92, M30 and M2, etc. are not supported in scale and array functions, neither are
subprograms in the tool path. If there are codes mentioned before, the system will prompt manual or
automatic deletion.

3.14.3 Screw Error Compensation

3.14.3.1 Causes of Screw Error and Compensation Method
Screw error consists of screw pitch error and errors caused by backlash. Generally, these two errors
don‘t need compensation, but backlash compensation is needed in high precision required situation, if
higher precision is required, both the two compensations are needed.
 Pitch Compensation
Pitch error is caused by screw defect and long-term wear, etc. In order to improve precision, pitch
compensation is needed to meet the requirement. The sketch of a screw is shown in Fig. 3-57(A). A
coordinate system is established, based on ―0‖ point on the screw as the reference point, nominal value
as X-coordinate, and actual value as Y-coordinate. Then the ideal moving curve is as curve ―1‖ in Fig.
3-57(B), however, the actual curve will be curve ―2‖ due to pitch error. That is to say, the Actual value is
not the same as its corresponding Nominal value, the actual moving curve deviating from the ideal one,
and their difference is called error, i.e.:
Error = Nominal machine coordinate – Actual machine coordinate

「88」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

L (Actual Value)

2
Actual Move (With Pitch Error)
Reference Point

Ideal Move (Without Pitch Error)

1
5 S (Nominal Value)
0

(A) Sketch of Screw (B) Picture of Moving Curve

Fig. 3-57 Analysis of Pitch Error

 Pitch Error Compensation Method

In pitch compensation, generally pitch error value isn‘t related to feed direction. That is, when the pitch is
too small in positive feed, additional pulse is needed, and thus, when negative feed passes the same
position, the same amount of feed pulse should be added. But if the pitch is large, deduction of pulse is
needed, and neither is the reducing amount related to feed direction. In software compensation,
correction of each point on the error curve should be tabulated and saved to the system memory. Then
auto compensation for coordinates of each point is available in running, so as to improve machine
precision.
Please see pitch compensation wizard part in section 3.16.1 for detailed compensation method.
 Backlash Compensation
Hysteresis feature is caused by forward and reverse clearance. Assume that driving shaft drives driven
shaft in negative (CW) rotation, servo motor will be idling without moving worktable because of
mechanical driving chain backlash, when the driving shaft suddenly begins CCW rotation (positive
motion). After staying at a certain position for some time, the worktable will move backward with the
driving shaft; when the direction of the driving shaft changes again, the situation is the same, which is
called Hysteresis. If pitch error doesn‘t exist, under ideal condition, the moving curve of worktable is
shown in Fig. 3-58 (A), in which the curve of horizontal section is during the idling of servo motor without
worktable movement. The actual moving curve of worktable is shown in Fig. 3-58(B).

L (Actual Value) L (Actual Value)

S (Nominal Value) S (Nominal Value)

(A) Hysteresis Feature (B) Actual Moving Curve

Fig. 3-58 Analysis of Backlash

The popular explanation is: because spindle is generally fixed on the screw whose outer wire and the
inner wire on the outer wire cannot be completely matched, backlash compensation compensates the

Software Operation「89」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

clearance between the screws of last direction that the spindle needs to finish after reversing its moving
direction.
 Measuring Method and Compensation Method
Backlash can be measured by a specialized gauge. Firstly, fix the instrument nearby the spindle.
Secondly, make the watch hand at the zero point position (machine origin). Thirdly, manually move ―a‖
millimeter, then move back ―a‖ millimeter, and then see the actual moving distance of watch hand ―b‖
millimeter. Therefore, the backlash is measured, namely (a-b) millimeter.
If one axis moves from positive to negative, ―+Q‖ pulse will be output before reversal; conversely, from
negative to positive, ―-Q‖ pulse will be output before reversal (Q is backlash, preset by the program).

3.14.3.2 Screw Error Compensation Operation

Actually the system has already combined the above two errors (screw pitch error and backlash) to deal
with and will execute error compensation automatically based on the error data in the file after the
backward error and forward error of the corresponding nominal coordinate of each coordinate axis are
listed into the screw error compensation file.
The detailed operation is: save the measured value of compensation in file ―axeserr.dat‖, found under
the installation directory, i.e. under D:\Naiky\NK-300A\Config\std (varies with system configurations).
The system will execute compensation as the file described immediately.
 Screw Error Compensation File “axeserr.dat”
The name of the screw error compensation file is ―axeserr.dat‖, found under the installation directory, i.e.
under D:\Naiky\NK-300A\Config\std. Modification to the data in the screw error compensation file will
become valid after the software is restarted.
The file format is:
1) Firstly specify length unit, currently the supported length unit is mm and the style of writing is:
unit = mm
2) Then specify error sequence of each axis. To work properly, the contents in this sequence must
be in the ascending order of nominal machine coordinate value. Refer to Table 3-2 for details.
3) Annotation: it must be in a separate line and started with a semicolon. Its syntax is:
;<Annotation contents>
Note that a semicolon must be the first character of the separate line, that is, no other character should
be in front of the semicolon, even blank space.
Table 3-2 Explanation about Axis Error Sequence

Item Specification

Axis Name X, Y, Z, (Case-insensitive)

It is the machine coordinate with a sign with respect to reference point, which is
Nominal
calculated by the given pitch and pulse equivalent (i.e. the length calculated
Machine
based on the nominal pitch, not on the actual physical one), arranged in
Coordinate
ascending order. Nominal machine coordinate must be within the stroke range,

「90」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Item Specification
or the compensation is invalid.
Backward Error The error generated by the motion towards decreasing direction of coordinate
Forward Error The error generated by the motion towards growing direction of coordinate value.
value.
The style of writing of each axis error sequence:
[Axis Name]
<Nominal Machine Coordinate>, < Forward Error>, < Backward Error>
<Nominal Machine Coordinate>, < Forward Error >, < Backward Error >
<Nominal Machine Coordinate>, < Forward Error >, < Backward Error >
The sign of nominal machine coordinate and actual machine coordinate
Pay special attention to the sign of nominal machine coordinate and actual machine coordinate,
especially when equipment like laser interferometer is used to measure the length. Calculate after
the measured length is converted to the corresponding machine coordinates, or a wrong result may
occur.

Table 3-3 Example of Screw Error Compensation File Format

Condition Example Remark

;unit=mm
【X】
-570.025, 0.027, 0.083
Common cases
-450.020, 0.025, 0.077
-330.015, 0.015, 0.068
-210.010, 0.000, 0.057
Only the data of start point
;unit=mm and end point of this axis
A certain axis only needs 【Y】 needs writing down. If the
backlash compensation 0.000, 0.000, 0.030 backlash compensation
1000.00, 0.000, 0.030 on Y-axis is 0.03mm, the
setting range is 0  1000.

 Related Parameters

Parameter Details Setting Range

It sets whether to enable screw error
N12000 Screw Error Comp compensation and decides 0; 1; 2
compensation type.
Backlash
It sets whether to enable backlash YES: Valid
N12001 Compensation
compensation. NO: Invalid
Only
1. There are three options for parameter N12000, which are 0 (no compensation), 1
(unidirectional compensation) and 2 (bidirectional compensation).
Unidirectional compensation
a) To compensate by reading ―Err Pos.‖ data (unidirectional error data) and backlash value in
the screw compensation interface, set N12000 to ―1‖ and N12001 to ―YES‖.

Software Operation「91」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

b) To compensate by only reading ―Err Pos.‖ data (unidirectional error data) in the screw
compensation interface, set N12000 to ―1‖ and N12001 to ―NO‖.
Bidirectional compensation
To enable bidirectional compensation, i.e. to compensate by reading ―Err Pos.‖ (forward error)
and ―Err Neg..‖ (backward error) data in the screw compensation interface, set N12000 to ―2‖.
No compensation
To disable compensation, set N12000 to ―0‖, and N12001 to ―NO‖.
2. When parameter N12001 is set to ―YES‖, it means to enable the backlash compensation; when
it is set to ―NO‖, it means that backlash compensation will not be enabled and comprehensive
compensation will be made by reading backlash value and pitch error data from the error file.
Enable Backlash Compensation:

To only enable backlash compensation, set N12000 to ―0‖ and N12001 to ―Yes‖.

3.14.3.3 Software Interface and Operation

Press the advanced function selection key to access interface 「 Parameter 」 , open
manufacturer access, and you can find parameter N12000. Set the value of the parameter as you need
no compensation, single compensation or double compensation. And then press key ―4‖ to access
interface 「Screw Error Comp (4)」. Unidirectional and bidirectional compensation interfaces are shown
in Fig. 3-59 and Fig. 3-60.

Fig. 3-59 Interface 「Unidirectional Compensation」

「92」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-60 Interface 「Bidirectional Compensation」

Unidirectional compensation is fit for the situation that the forward error and backward error are relatively
stable. If forward direction is the first in measure, enter the forward error (default) into ―Err Pos.‖; if
backward direction the first in measure, enter the backward error into ―Err Pos.‖ Backlash of each axis
can be used together.
Bidirectional compensation reads forward error and backward error to execute comprehensive
compensation, fit for the situation that forward error and backward error are not stable. ―Backlash‖ is not
shown on the double compensation interface.
 Unit
Coord. (Position coordinate): mm
Err Pos. (unidirectional error), Err Pos. (forward error), Err Neg. (backward error), backlash: μm
 Insert and Delete
Press F1 to insert an input line, enter the coordinate and error value; press F2 to delete the
compensation data in the line where the cursor stays.
 Check
Check function is used to check whether the compensation inputted is valid. If the data is valid, the
system will prompt ―The data is legal and can be applied or exported‖; if the data is invalid, the system
will show the reason why it is invalid; if there is no compensation data and you press F3, the system will
prompt ―Valid data is not detected‖.
You can enter and check the compensation data line by line, and you can also check the validity of all
data you have entered in all lines.
 Setting
Press F4 to access the dialog box ―Setting‖. In this dialog box, you can generate a set of compensation
position in the compensation list by entering input box ―Starting Position‖, ―Pointing Spacing‖ and
―Measuring Points‖. You can enter the compensation data line by line. See Fig. 3-61.

Software Operation「93」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-61 Setting-[Screw Err Comp(4)]

 Import and Export

By pressing F5, you can import three types of files, ―.lin‖, ―.rtl‖ and ―axeserr.dat‖. The system supports
importing files from an USB disk.
Press F6, and the system will prompt ―<export> will cover original file, are you sure?‖; press ―Yes‖, and
the system will export the above compensation data into file ―axeserr.dat‖. And the system will
automatically detect whether any flash disk exist. If flash disks are detected, the data will be exported to
a flash disk; if flash disks are not detected, the data will be exported to directory
―D:\Naiky\NK300A\Config‖.

CAUTION

1) Check whether the .lin or .rtl file to be imported is generated correctly.

2) After manually modifying the axeserr.dat file, check whether the data of each axis is arranged in ascending
order or descending order, and whether the data, including nominal coordinate, forward error, and backward
error, are correct compared to the backlash of each axis.
3) After switching from unidirectional compensation to bidirectional compensation and restarting the software,
load the file again to refresh the forward error and backward error of bidirectional compensation.
4) To improve the precision of the imported file, the data should be the average of multi-measurement (at least
two times) on the same coordinate position.
Compensation error data= Measured error data- Error data of machine origin
 Delete All
This key is used for deleting all data.
 Apply
After this key is pressed, the compensation data will be written into the drive, and the axeserr.dat file will

「94」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

be saved to the D disk.

CAUTION
1) After modification to Coord. (position coordinate), Err Pos. (unidirectional error), Err Pos. (forward error),
Err nEG. (backward error), backlash, parameters N12000 and N12001 and execution of “Apply”, there is a
must to return to machine origin first to ensure compensation accuracy.
2) Error value= Actual machine coordinate- Nominal machine coordinate
3) Ascending sequence and descending sequence can be set.
4) Check whether there is any invalid data in the axeserr.dat file after opening the software and importing the
file.

3.14.4 Across Quadrant Error Compensation

Across quadrant error compensation, also called friction compensation, refers to the distortion, the most
commonly seen is a spike, at the conversion part of two adjacent quadrants in circle machining of a
machine tool. To eliminate this kind of distortion, error compensation is necessary.
Across quadrant compensation parameters are used for spike compensation when machining arc
passes across quadrants. The setting method along positive and negative directions of X/Y/Z is similar.

 Related Parameters
For there are 12 groups of parameters ―time‖, ―distance‖, ―delay‖ and ―intensity‖, only one of them is
listed in the following table.

Parameter Details Setting Range

Setting whether to enable
Turn On AQE
N12020 Turn On AQE Compensation across quadrant
Compensation
compensation
The bigger the value is, the larger
the area will be influenced by the
N12100 Time (Group 0) 0~10
compensation. The recommended
value is about 0.02 s.
N12101 Distance (Group 0) 0~10

N12102 Delay (Group 0) 0~10

N12103 Intensity (Group 0) 0~1

To make across quadrant compensation effective, parameter N12020 should be set to ―YES‖.
The larger the value of ―Distance‖ is, the more obvious the compensation result will be. But note
that too large value will make the arc concave, and too small value cannot decrease the arc height
effectively. The recommended setting value is 0.3~3 times of the actual height of the spike
measured by a measuring device like a laser interferometer (compensation result and
compensation time are related to compensation intensity).

Software Operation「95」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

Delay: the spike may not exactly appear at the conversion part on some machine tools due to the
difference of mechanical property of each machine tool, but a distance away from the quadrant
point. Estimate the time for finishing this distance and set it as the value of the ―Delay‖.
Intensity has an influence on the compensation result: the bigger the value is, the more obvious the
result will be.

3.15 Log and Diagnosis

3.15.1 Alarm

Press to access functional area [Diagnosis] and open interface 「Alarm (1)」, as shown in Fig.
3-62. What shown in the interface is alarm information, including ―alarm description‖, ―alarm appeared‖
and ―alarm disappeared‖. You can press F1and F2 in the operational button bar to choose to show the
existing alarms or history of alarms.

Fig. 3-62 Interface 「Alarm (1)」

3.15.2 Log

Press key to access functional area [Diagnosis], and then press key ―2 ― to open interface
「Log(2)」.
The interface 「Log(2)」 shows important operations and system events. Not only can the log info since

「96」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

this time start-up be browsed, but also history records can be viewed. See Fig. 3-63.

Fig. 3-63 Interface 「Log(2)」

 Refresh
Press F1 to refresh the log list in order to make it synchronize with the system.
 Remove
Press F2 to remove all the current log information.
 Show Information, Show Alarms and Show Errors
The shortcut keys are ―F3‖, ―F4‖ and ―F5‖ respectively for ―show information‖, ―show alarms‖ and ―show
errors‖.
The default state is checked and highlighted in blue, namely the system displays normal information,
alarms and error info by default. If you don‘t need certain info displayed, you can press the
corresponding shortcut key to eliminate the blue highlight. For example, you can press F5 (shortcut key
of [Show Errors]) to make the button bounced and the system will hide the error info.
 System
Press F6 to view the system info.
 History
Press F8 to display all the logs since recording.

3.15.3 Port

Press to access functional area [Diagnosis], and then press key ―3 ― to open interface 「Port(3)」.

Please see section 3.2 for operation about interface 「Port (3)」.

Software Operation「97」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.15.4 Diagnosis

Press to access functional area [Diagnosis], and then press key ―4― to open interface
「Diagnosis(4)」.
The interface 「Diagnosis(4)」 displays current feedback machine coordinates of each axis. After
inputting a valid sampling port into the channel and setting sampling interval, press F1 to diagnose the
corresponding port. See Fig. 3-64.

Fig. 3-64 Interface 「Diagnosis(4)」

 Start
Press F1 to start diagnosing the corresponding port.
 Stop
Press F2 to stop diagnosing the corresponding port.
 Clear Screen
Press F3 to clear the diagnosis result of the corresponding port.
 Grid On
Press F4 to bring grid lines into the sampling window.
 Setting
Press F5 to set the sampling interval, as shown in Fig. 3-65.

「98」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-65 Dialog Box of Setting Sampling Interval

Select a sampling interval in range (20ms, 100ms, 1s and 20s), and press F7 to confirm. And then back
to interface 「Diagnosis(4)」, and press F1 to start sampling periodically the corresponding port or PLC
address, realizing tracking detection of the port.
 Monitor Off
Press F6 to cancel the monitoring of the corresponding port.

3.16 Program File Management

Program file management manages the machining files in the system, related to operation of machining
program.

3.16.1 Machining Wizard

NK300CX offers 5 basic machining program wizards: circular contour, circular pocket, rectangular
contour, rectangular pocket and screw measure. You just need to input some simple parameters to
complete the operation of circular contour and rectangular contour, etc. Take circular contour milling as
an example in the following:

Press key to access functional area [Program], and press key ―4‖ to open interface
「Wizard(4)」. Then press key ―O‖ to enter the circular contour wizard screen, as shown in Fig. 3-66. To
achieve the desired results, you can set parameters for the selected machining shape, such as milling
inner contour or outer contour (milling inner contour mills the region inside, and milling outer contour
mills along the contour), part diameter, start point X/Y, single infeed, total depth (of several accumulated
cutting) and tool diameter. After parameters are set, it is suggested to save them before loading the
wizard into the system.

Software Operation「99」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Besides, export of the settings is supported in the system. You can export the complete program file of
the current parameter setting to the local directory. Press F8, and you can view the exported file in
interface 「Local (1)」 under the same functional area. In interface 「Local (1)」, you can execute
operations including ―Load‖, ―Edit‖, ―Delete‖, ―Array‖, ―Unload‖, ―New‖, ―Rename‖ and ―Copy to USB‖ to
the selected file. The default file names of the exported file in the five basic wizards are ―CirContour.nc‖,
―CirPocket.nc‖, ―RectContour.nc‖, ―RectPocket.nc‖, and ―ScrewErr Measure_X.nc‖. Please note that only
one program file of a wizard exported can be copied to local directory. In other words, for the same
wizard, the latest program file exported to local directory will cover the file exported last time.
The operation method and parameter setting principle of circular pocket, rectangular contour and
rectangular pocket are the same as those of circular contour, except the setting of some parameters.

Fig. 3-66 Interface 「Circular Contour(O)」

In interface 「Wizard(4)」, press key ―S‖ to access interface 「Screw Measure(S)」, as shown in Fig. 3-67.
You can set relevant parameters for desired effect of machining drawing.
Wizard ―Screw Measure‖ is used to measure screw error via laser interferometer.
Enter the values for start and end points, measuring points, repeats and dwell time, and then press F2 to
save the setting. The system will generate a program file automatically to the directory
D:\NcFiles\Wizards. Press F1 to load the file into the system.

「100」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-67 Interface 「Screw Measure(S)」

Or you can directly press F1 after setting parameters to save and load files. After the first time setting, if
you modify the parameter values and press F1, a prompt will pop up, as shown in Fig. 3-68. Select ―Yes‖
to save and load the newly generated file.

Fig. 3-68 Prompt for New Parameter File

CAUTION
1) To begin with the operation, an axis should be selected, besides, X/Y/Z-axis can only be selected alone at
one time.
2) The startpoint and end point should be located within the travel range and the latter must be larger than the
former in absolute value.
3) One cycle refers to the process from the starting position to end position, during which, interferometer will
record a group of data. However, a mean value will be used when written into the screw error file.
4) Measuring interval = (End position-Start position) / (Num of measuring points-1). To get an accurate
measuring result, the starting position and end position should be calculated precisely and the number of
measuring points should be an integer.

Software Operation「101」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.16.2 Program File

Press the program function selection key to enter the machining file screen, and then press key
―1‖, ―2‖,‖3‖ to switch between interface 「Local(1)」, 「USB(2)」 and 「Network(3)」, as shown in Fig.
3-69.
 Local
A list of local program files under the root directory D:\NcFiles are displayed in interface 「Local(1)」. The
upper part of this interface is a file list box, while the lower part prompts the path of the currently selected
file and available space of the driver. Press ―↑‖ or ―↓‖ to move the cursor onto a program file, and then
press key "F1~F8" to execute corresponding operations to the file. Press F1 to load a file, and loading
progress displayed on the information bar. At the same time, the system will automatically check the file
being loaded. If an error is found in the file, a specific prompt about the error will be displayed on the
information bar. After successful loading, other operations can be executed.

Fig. 3-69 Interface 「Local(1)」

You can find the machining files under the default path of the hard disk (D:\NcFiles) and execute such
operations as load, edit, delete and rename, etc. on them. In addition, you can create a new machining
file under the default path and edit it.
 USB
Press key ―2‖ to access interface 「USB(2)」 where the program files under the root directory and
subdirectory folders of USB disks, as shown in Fig. 3-70. The operation in the interface is similar to that
in interface 「Local(1)」.

「102」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-70 Interface 「USB(2)」

 Network
Press key ―3‖ to access interface 「Network(3)」. In this interface, visiting among several machines
sharing the same LAN are supported. Tool path files on the local directory or shared within the LAN are
displayed in this interface, click the blank box behind ―Specify File Path(H)‖ to select files on the local
directory or shared within the LAN, as shown in Fig. 3-71. The operation in the interface is similar to that
in interface 「Local(1)」.

Fig. 3-71 Interface 「Network(3)」

Software Operation「103」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

CAUTION
1) Folder NcFiles is the default folder for sharing files or open files, for convenience of easy access to several
machines.
2) To avoid mal-operations, delete function is beyond available for network programs. If you need to make any
modification to files on the network, you can copy it to the local first before any further operations.
3) When the network is disconnected, program files loaded from the LAN network to the local (not copy) will
be un-readable after power off or restart of the system or the software.
 Edit
After a machining file is selected, press F2 to make the system eject its embedded program editor
automatically, in which you can do the following operations to the file, like ―Insert line‖, ―Delete line‖,
―Copy line‖, ―Goto line‖, ―Find‖, ―Replace‖ and ―Save‖.
After selecting a file, press F3, a prompt box asking whether to delete the file will pop up.

CAUTION
1) Currently loaded file cannot be edited. Unload it before editing if necessary.
2) If the selected file is under the state of being loaded, edited or processed, deleting it is prohibited.
 Array
This function executes array machining for a machining file. Press F4 to access the sub interface, as
shown in Fig. 3-72.

Fig. 3-72 Array Machining

Press F1 ―Rect. Array‖ to open a lower hanging dialog box, where you can set the row number, column

「104」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

number, row spacing and column spacing, etc. After setting the items, press F7 to generate a file, whose
name can be user defined. After confirmation, the new generated file will appear in the program list.

Fig. 3-73 Dialog Box “Rectangular Array”

Press F2 to enable image mirror function, as shown in Fig. 3-74. Then press key ―↑‖ or ―↓‖ to switch
between ―Mirroring Direction‖ and ―Position Offset‖. When ―Mirroring Direction‖ is selected, press
―Select‖ key to select ―X-axis‖ mirroring or ―Y-axis‖ mirroring. When ―Mirroring Direction‖ is selected,
enter a value in input box ―Positioning Offset‖. After settings, press ―F7‖ to generate a file, whose name
can be user defined. After confirmation, the new generated file will appear in the program list.

Fig. 3-74 Dialog Box “Mirror and duplication”

Software Operation「105」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

CAUTION
The fucntion “array” only can be applied to NC files less than 5M, and subprograms cannot exist in the file
centent.
The fucntion “array” cannot be applied to commands such as “G28”, “G29”, “G65”, “M30”, “M2”, and tool path
files which contains subprograms. If any of the above commands appears in a tool path file, the system will
remind you to delete the command automatically of manually.
 Unload and Copy to Removable Disk
Press F5 to unload the currently loaded machining file, opposite to the operation of ―Load‖.
Press F8 (the premise is that a removable disk has already been inserted) to copy the selected file to a
removable disk.
Apart from NC files, the system also supports PLT files, DXF files and ENG files.
 New
Press F6, and the system will create a .nc file under the path D:\NCFILES with the default file name
―Untitle1.nc‖. The system will then automatically enter the program editor for your programming.
 Rename
After selecting a machining file, press F7. A file name input box will pop up. After entering the new name,
press ―OK‖ to complete the operation.

3.16.3 History

Press key to access functional area [Program] and press key ―5‖ to open interface 「History
(5)」 as shown in Fig. 3-75. A maximal of 22 records of successfully loaded program files are displayed
on the interface. The most recently loaded file is shown at the first place. When the record number
exceeds 22, the software will automatically clear the most remote records.
Load: you can load program files into history record by pressing key ―↑‖ and ―↓‖ to select a record and
then press F1 to load a program file as the current program file.
Unload: pressing key ―↑‖ and ―↓‖ to select a record and press F5 to unload the program file in this
record.
Clear All: clear all the records in interface 「History (5)」.

「106」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-75 Interface 「History (5)」

CAUTION
History records will remain after the software restarts or the system restarts caused by poweroff.

3.16.4 Parameter Specification

 Parameters related with PLT File Translation

Parameter Details Setting Range

It sets the tool lifting height during
N65000 Retract 0~99999
rapid traverse.
Normally, 1plt=40.195mm, which
N65001 PLT Units can be magnified or reduced by 0.001~99999
setting this parameter.
To process the workpiece
adequately, tool spacing set needs
to make the parts between the
N65002 Tool Offset adjacent tool paths overlapped 0.0001~99999
based on the tool diameter. Tool
offset here refers to the tool spacing
in PLT file machining.
It specifies the machining depth for
N65003 Cutting Depth -99999~0
2D files.
PLT file translation parameters are applied to translation of PLT files. PLT is a format of 2D
machining files defined by an American company Hewlett Packard (HP), usually used in

Software Operation「107」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

embossment and advertising carving, including such parameters as ―retract‖, “PLT units‖, ―tool
offset‖ and ―cutting depth‖. At the same time, PLT is a kind of unit. Normally, 1plt=40.195mm, which
can be magnified or reduced by setting the parameter N65001.

 Parameters related with DXF File Translation

Parameter Details Setting Range

It sets the tool lifting height during
N65100 Retract 0~99999
rapid traverse.
It specifies the machining depth for
N65101 Cutting Depth -99999~0
2D files.
It decides the cutting depth each
N65102 Layer Depth -99999~0
time in 2D machining.
YES: Use the first point as
It sets whether to set the firstly met
First Point as zero point
N65103 coordinate point as zero point when
Origin NO: Not use the first point
a DXF file is processed.
as zero point
Every time a shape is being
machined, next shape will be YES: Valid
N65104 By Contour
processed only after previous one is NO: Invalid
completed.
Valve operation is enabled only
Enable Bottom YES: Valid
N65105 when [3D cutting] is on the
Cutting NO: Invalid
workpiece surface.
YES: Forcibly set in metric
It forcibly sets a DXF file in metric size
N65106 Use Metric
size. NO: Not forcibly set in
metric size
DXF file translation parameters are applied to translation of DXF files, including ―retract‖, ―cutting
depth‖, ―layer depth‖, ―first point as origin‖ and ―by contour‖, etc.
When processing a Dxf file, the system treats the action of tool lifting as the separate mark for the
adjacent shapes. If there is no tool lifting, the system will consider only one shape is being
processed. If tool lifting occurs, it indicates the processing of a complete shape is finished. For
example, process several circles adjacent to each other, but not overlapped. The depth of each
circle is 10mm, and each feed depth of Z-axis is 2mm. If parameter N65104 is set to YES, the
machine tool will process the current circle 5 times, lift its tool, and then go to process the next
circle. If it is set to NO, the machine tool will process the current circle once, lift its tool, and then go
to process the next circle. After all the circles are processed once, this process will be re-executed 4
times to finish processing all the shapes.

「108」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

 Parameters related with ENG File Translation

Parameter Details Setting Range

It sets the tool lifting height of
Z-axis when a machine tool
N65200 Retract 0~99999
processes an ENG file in rapid
traverse.
If it is set to YES, when tool change
command is encountered, the
machine tool will suspend
machining and uplift its Z-axis, and
the prompt bar in the system will
prompt tool change. At this time,
Prompt for Tool YES: Valid;
N65201 you can perform the operation of
Change NO: Invalid
tool change. If it is set to NO, when
tool change command is
encountered, the machine tool will
not suspend machining, but the
prompt bar in the system will still
prompt tool change.
If this parameter is set to YES,
opening an Eng file will eject a
dialog box asking to select a tool
Cutting by Tool YES: Use;
N65203 (the tool specified in the Eng file
Number NO: Not use
instead of the system default tool)
for machining based on the
machining program.
0: Reciprocating chip
removal
Deep Hole Cutting It sets the manner for processing
N65204 1: High-speed reciprocating
Type deep holes.
chip removal
2: Up to safe height
It indicates the retract value after
feed each time in the manner of
N65205 Lifting Distance 0~99999
high-speed reciprocating chip
removal for deep hole drilling.
These two parameters are related to processing of deep holes.
Yes: Use the length or diameter
compensation of tools to translate
Force To Use Tool ENG when selected [Enable Cutter YES: Forcibly use;
N65206
Compensation Compensation]; No: the length or NO: Not forcibly use
diameter compensation commands
are inactive in ENG translation.

Software Operation「109」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

Modify Tool No. in With the function, the tool No. can YES: Enabled
N65207
ENG File be modified in machining. NO: Disabled
0: From safe height;
Starting position od Z-axis 1: From the highest point
N65208 Z-axis Plunge Type
plunging. (N10030 Table Travel
Upper Limit -1)
Lift when Change YES: Keep fixed
N65209 Lift the spindle when changing tool.
Tool NO: Lift to safe height
Ignore
Ignore Coordinate system YES: Enabled
N65210 Coordination
instruction in the ENG file. NO: Disabled
System Instruction
0: To R Plane
Z Lift Type after
N65211 Lifting types of Z-axis after drilling. 1: To specified position,
Drilling
exclusively of ENG file.
Z Position after Lift Z-axis to this position when ―Z
N65212 -1000~1000
Drilling Lift Type after Drilling‖ is set as ―1‖.
0: Feedrate in machining
N65213 Z Plunge Feedrate The plunging federate of Z-axis. 1: Feedrate in rapid
traversing

3.17 Handwheel Operation

3.17.1 Handwheel Mode

The system supports three operation modes—auto mode, manual mode and reference point mode.
Manual mode is subdivided into jog mode, stepping mode and handwheel mode. You can turn the mode
selection knob on the operation panel to ―handwheel‖, as shown in Fig. 3-76.

×1 ×10 ×100
Handle
×1000
Jog ×UD
Auto
REF. Point

Fig. 3-76 Mode Selection Knob

In handwheel mode, you can configure a handwheel to control the machine tool. As shown in Fig. 3-77,
select a motion axis by rotating ―Axis Selection Button‖, select handwheel override gear by rotating
―Gear Selection Button‖, and control the selected axis running at the selected handwheel override gear
by rotating ―Handwheel Control Rotation Disk‖. Handwheel override gear regulates the displacement

「110」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

(linear displacement or rotation angle) of moving parts of a machine tool with each case turning of a
handwheel. The displacement is set by parameters N52003, N52004 and N52005.

Axis selection Gear selection

button button

Control disk

Fig. 3-77 A Handwheel

 Related Parameters (under [Machine/Controller])

Parameter Details Setting Range

YES: The machine moves
When the parameter is set as
the exact pulses generated
Precise Pulse valid,the moving distance of the
N52001 by handwheel; NO: The
Counting machine tool corresponds to
machine stops when
handwheel counts strictly.
handwheel stops turning
If the parameter is set as valid, the machine tool will remain moving for a long time after the
handwheel stops which rotates too fast before stopping. The driver will receive all pulse signals sent
by the handwheel. However, if the parameter is set as invalid, the react time for the rotation of the
handwheel is shorter, while the distance the machine tool moves will not correspond to the
handwheel indicated when the handwheel rotates too fast.
1: Maintain the original
machine motion direction
Positive/negative motion direction of
Handwheel in handwheel turning
N52002 a machine tool when turning a
Direction -1: Reverse the original
handwheel
machine motion direction
in handwheel turning
The system will interpret 1 pulse is
N52003 Multiple at X1 received when a handwheel sends 0.001~10
1 pulse.
The system will interpret 10 pulses
N52004 Multiple at X10 are received when a handwheel 0.001~10
sends 1 pulse.

Software Operation「111」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

The system will interpret 100 pulses
N52005 Multiple at X100 are received when a handwheel 0.001~10
sends 1 pulse.
It sets the acceleration during
Handwheel handwheel mode (the smaller the
N52010 1~1000
Acceleration value is, the more stable the motion
will be).
If set to ―YES‖, oscillation of a
machine tool may be reduced, but
Deceleration when YES: Decelerate;
N52012 over-travel may occur. Otherwise,
Switching Axis NO: Not decelerate
oscillation of the machine tool may
occur.
HW Connection Control the HW Connection Code 0: To terminal Board
N52030
Code through setting parameters 1: To operation Panel

3.17.2 Handwheel Guide

NK300CX system supports handwheel guide function.
Handwheel guide refers to a way of operation that the automatic execution speed of a machining
program is manually controlled during auto processing so as to guard against dangers caused by a
wrongly loaded program or an inappropriate tool path.

In Auto mode, press the handwheel guide key Handle

on the operation panel. If the top-left indicator on, it
means the function is activated. After machining starts, the system will execute the machining file with
clockwise turning of the handwheel and stop machining with the stop of the handwheel. Machining
speed varies with the handwheel turning speed.
NK300CX also holds the function of handwheel reverse guide. Turn the handwheel anticlockwise when
an error is found in machining to make the machine tool reverse along the previous machining track. If
you do not need the function, you can change the value of parameter N52013 ―Forbid HW Reverse
Guide‖ into ―YES‖, i.e., to forbid handwheel reverse guide function. When you turn the handwheel
anticlockwise, the machine tool cannot reverse along the previous machining track and will not move.

 Related Parameters (under [Machine/Controller])

Parameter Details Setting Range

HW Lead Gear
N52006 This ratio is used to control the feed
(Numerator)
speed of a machine tool in 1~1000
HW Lead Gear
N52007 handwheel mode.
(Denominator)

「112」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Details Setting Range

YES: Axis stops when HW is turning
Forbid HW reversely in HW Guide; YES: Forbid
N52013
Reverse Guide NO: Axis moves normally when HW NO: Do not Forbid
is turning reversely

3.18 System Management

To access the system info functional area, press key . In interface 「System (1)」 of functional
area [System], you can view system info, proceed with system maintenance and switch configurations.

3.18.1 System Info

In functions area 「System」, the default interface displays system info, including CNC software info and
hardware info, as shown in Fig. 3-78.

Fig. 3-78 Interface 「System (1)」

Press F1 to register the time you use the software. For more details about registration, refer to section
3.18.4.

3.18.2 Configuration and Language Setting

1) Configuration Setting
NK300CX currently supports three-axis configuration, four-axis configuration and five-axis configuration.
In addition, you can add other configurations according to your needs. Press F3 in interface 「System

Software Operation「113」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

(1)」, the prompt box popping up is about manufacturer access detection. You can verify your access by
entering your manufacturer password. Once your access is verified, dialog box [Configuration Manager]
will pop up. You can select the configuration in the box according to your needs. The current
configuration is shown in blue at the bottom of the box. See Fig. 3-79.

Fig. 3-79 Dialog Box 「Configuration Manager」

To switch to other configurations, press ―↑‖ or ―↓‖ to move the cursor to the desired one, and then press
F7 to confirm. A dialog box asking ―Set successfully!‖ will pop put. It takes effect after restarting the
system. Would you like to restart the system immediately?‖ Press F6 and the system will be restarted to
enable configuration switchover. After system restarted, you need to set relevant parameters again.
 Three Axes Configuration
Three Axes Standard: the machining axes are X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis.
Rotatory Table: the machining axes are X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis, and Y-axis is rotatory table.
Double Y: the machining axes are X-axis, Y1 axis, Y2 axis and Z-axis
 Four Axes Configuration
Four Axes (A Model): the machining axes are X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and A-axis.
Four Axes (B Model): the machining axes are X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and B-axis.
Four Axes(C Model): the machining axes are X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis.
 Five Axes Configuration
Five Axes (AB Model): the machining axes are X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, A-axis and B-axis.
Five Axes (AC Model): the machining axes are X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, A-axis and C-axis.
Five Axes (BC Model): the machining axes are X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, B-axis and C-axis.
2) Language Setting
Press F4 in functional area [System] to access a dialog box ―Language Manager‖. At present, there are
two languages for option—―Chinese‖ and ―English‖. You can run the system in a familiar language by

「114」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

pressing ―↑‖ or ―↓‖ to move the cursor onto the desired language and then pressing F7 to confirm. The
system will then give a prompt ―Succeeded! Restart the software to take effect.‖ Press F7 to restart the
software.

3.18.3 IP Setting

Press key to enter functional area [System], and then press key ―2‖ to view computer
information and set network.
NK300CX supports network connection. You can obtain IP address automatically or set it manually.
 Auto Obtain IP Address
DHCP function is enabled to achieve auto obtain. In sub-interface 「Computer (2)」, press F1 to open
dialog box ―Network Setting‖. Press key ―Select‖ to make the software obtain IP address automatically.
See Fig. 3-80.

Fig. 3-80 Auto Obtain IP Address

The system will obtain an IP address automatically when ―Auto Obtain IP Address‖ is set as ―ON‖.
 Manually Set IP Address
In Fig. 3-80 , press letter key N to manually set the IP address.

Software Operation「115」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-81 Manually Set IP Address

When ―Auto Obtain IP Address‖ is set as ―OFF‖, you have to set IP Address manually. Press key ―↑‖ and
―↓‖ to select input boxes and enter the IP address.
 IP address: 192.168.1.188 (within the same range of that of the computer)
 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 (same as that of the computer)
 Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1 (same as that of the computer)
After setting, press F7 for confirmation. And you can turn to the interface 「Computer (2)」 to view the
setting.

CAUTION
Please note that manual setting of NK300CX IP will reset the IP of the computer.

3.18.4 Registration
―Register‖ in interface 「System(1)」 in functional area [System] is used to decide system service time
with the help of a registration code generated in APP ―NcStudio Generator‖ launched by Weihong
Electronic Technology Co. Ltd.. The registration steps are as follows.

3.18.4.1 “NcStudio Generator”

You can search Apple APP Store for ―Weihong‖, find and install APP ―NcStudio Generator‖. Make sure
you have already filled and stamped the fax file ―APP Registration Info Confirmation Letter‖ sent rom
Weihong and have returned it to Weihong before using the APP. Weihong will record the information in
the confirmation letter you have returned.
 Bind your mobile phone number to the APP
You must bind your mobile phone number to the APP before using it. A dialog box shown as Fig. 3-82 will
pop up when you launch the APP for the first time. Click on ―OK‖ to close the box. Then click on ―Bind‖ in
the lower left of the interface. Fill in the information to bind your number to the APP in the interface as
shown in Fig. 3-83.

「116」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-82 Bind(1) Fig. 3-83 Bind (2)

CAUTION

1) Your company name, user name, cellphone number must be the same as recorded by Weihong. Otherwise,
you can‟t register successfully.
2) The “set passward” must be 6 digits or characters. Repeat the password in the next line, otherwise the
password cannot be set successfully.
 Login
You can login with the phone number you have bound to the APP. Click ―Verification code‖ in the
interface as shown in Fig. 3-84. The APP will send a short message containing a verification code to you.
And a countdown from 59 to 0 is shown in the interface. The prompt info ―Please input verification code‖
will turn into ―Time out, please request code again‖. After receiving the code, input the code and then the
password in the interface, as shown in Fig. 3-85, to login.

Software Operation「117」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-84 Login-1 Fig. 3-85 Login -2

If you forget your password, please contact with

Weihong Electronic Technology Co. Ltd. Click on
―forget‖, and a prompt message containing the
official service number of Weihong will appear on
the screen, as shown in
Fig. 3-86.

Fig. 3-86 Forget Password

「118」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

 Function Page
After login, you will enter the function page. Your company name will be shown under the navigation bar
automatically.

Fig. 3-87 Function Page

Device number: you can enter the device number here directly, or click the camera icon to open the
camera on the phone and scan the device number on the device. However, the scanning function is not
supported by now.
Register type: If you select ―By day‖ as registration type, you can click on ―Select‖ under ―Time limit‖ to
choose a time limit from range ―1 week, 1 month, 6months, 12 months, permanent; or you can click on
the calendar icon to choose specific days. Register time is calculated from the day you register. If you
choose registering by hour, you can enter the time in the input box under ―Time limit‖.
Get Registration Code: click on ―Get Registration Code‖, and the grey box under ―Get Registration
Code‖ will load until the writing code appear in the box automatically. When the grey box is loading, three
continuously dynamic dots load repeatedly.
Send SMS: click on ―Send SMS‖, and the interface will jump to interface ―Edit SMS‖. The writing code
you have received will be added to the SMS automatically.

CAUTION

The system supports registering by hour or by day. If you choose to register by day, service time will be counted
according to system internal clocking, no matter the system is power off or not. And if you choose to register by

Software Operation「119」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

hour, service time will be counted according to system internal clocking. However, after the system is power off,
the service time will not get less until the system is power on.
 User Information
Click the head icon in the upper left of the navigation bar in function page to open user information page,
as shown in Fig. 3-88.

Fig. 3-88 User Information Page

 History
Click the clock icon in the upper right of the navigation bar in function page to open user information
page, as shown in Fig. 3-89.

「120」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-89 History Page

3.18.4.2 Registration with Registration Code

After obtaining a registration code in the APP, you can register in NK300CX.
When the machine tool is in non-machining state, i.e., idle or E-stop state, you can register as the steps
below. Do not register when the machine tool is in machining state, i.e., machining or stop state.
Otherwise, the software will warn that ―Unable to perform the action under the current mode‖.
The steps to register are as follows:
1) In interface 「System (1)」 under functional area [System], view the current device number. Or you
can view the device number in dialog box ―Register‖ after pressing F1 in the interface 「System(1)」,
as shown in Fig. 3-90. The number is also the device number shown in Fig. 3-87.

Software Operation「121」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-90 View Device Number

2) Input the registration code generated in the APP into the input box ―Registration code‖ in dialog box
―Register‖, as shown in Fig. 3-90. Then press F7 to confirm.
3) The system prompts ―Register successfully. Please restart software!‖ Restart the machine. After
restart, you can view the current left time for use in interface 「System (1)」 in functional area
[System].

CAUTION
ID of board card varies as the registration times increases, which can be tell from the last three number of the
serial number. For example, when registration times is 0, the last three number of the SN is 000. While when
registration times is 1, the last three number of the SN is 001.
After registration, the normal service time of the software is limited. When the service time is nearly
expired or already expired, different prompt info will pop up according to the current registration state
and service time. And please note some functions will be disabled when the software expired. An
introduction of software when it is expired or will be expired soon is shown as below.
 Registration Time Close to Expiration Time

Software Software Tips

Time Left Remarks
State Sign of Tips Content of Tips
Longer
No tips.
than 7 days
Open 1~7 days ―The software will expire after n d.
A dialog box
Less than Please contact with the
popping up
1day manufacturer!‖

「122」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Software Software Tips

Time Left Remarks
State Sign of Tips Content of Tips
Longer
No tips.
than 7 days
―The software will expire after n
4~7 days day(s).‖
Prompt every 6 hours. Any other
Running Yellow ―The software will expire after n warning will clear
1~3 days Warning day(s).‖ the tip. And you
Sign. Prompt every 2 hours. can clear it by
―The software will expire after n pressing any key.
Less than 1
day(s).‖
day
Prompt every hour.

 The software expires.

1) When you open the software,
Software interface will not show. Only a dialog box reminding users to register will pop up.
2) When the software is running,
In non-machining state, the machine tool will enter expired state. A red warning ―The software is expired.
Please contact with the manufacturer!‖ will appear in the info bar. And the warning will not disappear until
e-stop info covers it.
If the software expires during machining, the system will stop machining immediately and enter expired
state. A red warning ―The software is expired. Please contact with the manufacturer!‖ will appear in the
info bar. And the warning will not disappear until e-stop info covers it.

CAUTION
If the software expired, commands such as “Start”, “Advanced Start”, and “Resume” are disabled, but manually
moving the machine tool is enabled.

3.19 Auxiliary Function

3.19.1 Single Block Execution

You can set the machining task to be executed in single step mode, facilitating error diagnosis and failure
recovery. Once in single block mode, the system stops machining when resultant velocity of each axis is
―0‖.
When the single block key on the operation panel is pressed, the system will only execute the machining
file for one line each time the START button is pressed, and then enter into the pause state. To go to the
next line, you need to press the START button again.

Software Operation「123」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.19.2 Back to Workpiece Origin

The origin of WCS (workpiece coordinate system), i.e. workpiece origin, is fixed with respect to a certain
point on the workpiece, while mobile with respect to machine origin. The selection of workpiece origin
should meet the demands of simple programming, easy dimension conversion and small caused
machining error, etc.

To back to workpiece origin, press the general function selection key , and then press F7 to
make the spindle return to workpiece origin automatically from the current position.

3.19.3 Jiggle
If machining is found not in position in machining, suspend machining and execute manual jiggle. Jiggle
result is only available for the current machining task, and becomes ineffective after machining stops.

Jiggle function can be found by pressing key , and F6. After pressing key in
auto machining, press F6 to access the jiggle interface, as shown in Fig. 3-91. Press key ―Select‖ to set a
proper step. The system provides step values including 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 and 0.5. And then
press an axis direction key to jiggle the corresponding axis. After satisfying jiggle result is obtained,
press key ―START‖ to continue machining.

Fig. 3-91 Jiggle Setup

The steps to execute ―Jingle‖ operation during machining are similar to those described above. And
machining will not break during jiggle.

「124」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

CAUTION
In manual mode, function “jiggle” is disabled and the “jiggle” button is inactive in grey.

3.19.4 Advanced Start

Function ―Advanced Start‖ is used for select any blocks for machining, and it is classified into advanced
start with selected lines and advanced start with selected tools.
In advanced start with selected lines, you can enter the start line number and end line number of a
machining program block. Press key ―Start‖, and the system will machine from the start line to the end
line of the program block and stop machining.
In advanced start with selected tools, you can enter a tool number. After finding the tool number, the
program block will set the line where the tool number appears as the start line. Press key ―Start‖, and the
system will start machining from the ―start line‖ to the end line of the machining program and stop
machining.

Press key to access functional area [Machining], and press key ―1‖ to open interface 「Coor(1)」.
Then press F3, dialog box ―Advanced Start‖ will pop up, as shown in Fig. 3-92. Press key ―↑‖ and ―↓‖ to
switch between input boxes.

Fig. 3-92 Dialog Box of Advanced Start

Current Line: the line number of the current machining program command line.
Total Line: the number of total command lines in the program file.
Start Line: you can enter the start line of a machining program block. Effective range is {0, end line
number}
End Line: you can enter the end line of a machining program block. Effective range is {start line number,

Software Operation「125」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

the maximal line number}

Goto Line with Tx: you can enter the tool number which will execute machining. The default for the item
is the current tool number. If the tool number of the current spindle tool is 1, the default will be 1. And if
the tool number of the current spindle tool is 2, the default will be 2.
Reset: if you press button ―F1 Reset‖, the system will automatically reset the start line number as ―0‖ and
end line number as the maximal line number.
GOTO: press button ―F2 GOTO‖ after entering tool number, and the system will find the program line
where the tool number appears and set it is the start line. At the same time, the info bar will show the
result of finding. Press the button repeatedly to find different lines where the tool number exists in a
program file.
After machining settings, you can view the start and end line number to be machined in the file name on
each interface and the upper left part of interface 「Machining(2)」.

Fig. 3-93 View the Start and End Line Number of Advanced Start

CAUTION
Function “GOTO” can only be used for G-code program file.

3.19.5 Mirror and Rotation

This function can execute mirror and rotation on a machining file.

Mirror and rotation function can be set on the interface 「Machining」 by pressing key and

. Press F4 to open the mirror and rotation machining dialog box, as shown in Fig. 3-94. Press
―Select‖ button to select a machining mode and set the coordinate of the rotate centers on X\Y-axis. If

「126」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

rotate centers are not set, the default rotate center is the workpiece origin.

Fig. 3-94 Mirror and Rotate Setting on the Main Interface

After setting mirror and rotate information, you can check the information in the file names in all
interfaces and in interface 「Machining (2)」, as shown in Fig. 3-95.

Fig. 3-95 Mirror and Rotation Interface

CAUTION
1) Under maching mode “Normal”, “Mirror in X-axis” and “Mirror inY-axis”, the value of rotation centers
acannot be modified and in grey.

Software Operation「127」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

2) In manual mode, function “Mirror/Rotation” is disabled and the button is in grey.

3.19.6 Breakpoint Resume

This function is executed by pressing the breakpoint resume key on the operation panel, which will make
the system resume machining from the stop line number of last time machining automatically.
If power failure or emergency stop occurs during machining, and you are sure about the accuracy of the
workpiece coordinates, you can execute this function to make a machine tool rapidly move to the
breakpoint and resume machining, to save machining time.

3.19.7 Workpiece Length Sensing

Workpiece length can be sensed by the system.
The system senses workpiece length by workpiece coordinates. For instance, to sense the workpiece
length in the X direction, the steps are as following:

1) Press key , and F1 to open the sub-bar 「Coor Display」;

2) Manually move the X-axis to one side of workpiece, and then press ―F1‖ to switch to ―Relative‖
Coordinate and press ―F2‖ to clear the relative coordinate on X-axis.
3) Manually move the X-axis to the other side of workpiece. Workpiece length in X direction equals the
X-axis ―Relative‖ value displayed on the interface.
4) Workpiece length sensing of other axes is similar to the steps described above.

CAUTION
Clearing relative coordinates function has no effect on absolute coordinates and machine coordinates, so you can
still use the original coordinates for machining.

3.19.8 Restore Parameters

The system boasts the function of parameter auto backup. If you forget to save the set parameters, you
can switch to this screen, in which you can restore parameters from the ex-factory date to system last
shutdown.

Press key , and F1 to open dialog box ―Restore Parameter‖, as shown in Fig. 3-96.
Press key ―↑‖ or ―↓‖to select active backup parameters and press F1 to restore the selected
parameters.

「128」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-96 Dialog Box “Restore Parameter”

3.19.9 Manual Data Input (MDI)

You can enter and execute commands freely in functional area [MDI].

Press key and then press F8 in interface 「Coor(1)」 to access the MDI interface, as shown in
Fig. 3-97
In the middle of the interface are command lines. The current line is highlighted in blue. Press key ―↑‖ or
―↓‖ to select a line and enter your commands in the input box. After entering the new commands, press
key ―Enter‖ to confirm your input.
The newly entered instruction is at the top. You can press ―F1‖~‖F8‖ to execute commands in the
corresponding input box.

Press key next to exit the dialog box of MDI.

Software Operation「129」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 3-97 Manual Data Input Screen

3.20 Tool Magazine

Tool magazine, one of key component of ATC unit, is used to store tools and can be designed to different
types according to capacity and tool getting method. At present, three types of tool magazine are
supported for NK300CX, namely, linear tool magazine, disk-type tool magazine and servo tool
magazine.
There are two methods to change a tool, that is, manual and auto tool change. For machines without
ATC unit, manual tool change is the only option; while for those with ATC unit, both manual and auto tool
change are available, and auto tool change is better in terms of efficiency.
To activate auto tool change function, you need to specify the type of tool magazine first by setting
parameter of N66031 ―Tool Magazine Type‖ and N66030 ―Automatic Tool Measure‖.

3.20.1 Auto Tool Change for A Linear Tool Magazine

With relatively simple kinematics, linear tool magazine stores tools in the form of array. Procedure of tool
change may vary slightly due to different magazine-machine locations. In general software, the system
takes the linear tool magazine parallel to X-axis by default, as shown below.

Linear tool magazine

(The system takes linear tool magazine parallel to X-axis by default)

Fig. 3-98 An Example of Linear Tool Magazine

「130」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

For example, if a customer has 12 tools, he can select a 1-line 12-row tool magazine, or a 2-line 6-row
tool magazine, etc. Auto tool change is realized by programming in the public.dat file according to the
related information learned from the customer. The process of auto tool change for a linear tool
magazine is as following:

Start

Prompt “|R| Not returned No

to the machine origin”, Have returned to the machine
program ends. origin?
Z-axis moves to CTUP position
Yes

No X and Y axes move to target tool

Error prompt Is tool No. legal?
position
Yes
P r o m p t “ | Y | S e t No Z-axis moves to CTDOWN position
Are tool clamp/unclamp
parameter [Para.name]
related parameters enabled?
first”, program ends.
Yes Change tool No.

Prompt “|Y| No tool in the No Is tool clamp confirm signal

spindle”, program ends. detected? Prompt “|Y| Warning:
Tool clamp signal feeds out, No Spindle tool clamp signal
Yes wait for 200ms, and detect in-
position signal of tool clamp detection times out”,
Enable ATC travel limit. Lift at program ends.
pause inhibited (Switch to
independent movement mode) Yes
Y-axis moves to ATC ahead
position, and goes out magazine
pocket with target tool
Spindle stops (Spindle OFF)

Z-axis moves to CTUP position

Z-axis uplifts to CTUP position

Can tool magazine be pulled No

Y-axis moves to ATC ahead in?
position, and X-axis to current tool
position Yes

Tool magazine pulled in

Can tool magazine be No
pushed out?

Yes No
Whether to calibrate
Tool magazine pushed out automatically?

Yes

Execute fixed calibration?

Z-axis moves to CTDOWN position

Y-axis moves to changing tool

position, and goes into magazine Tool lift at pause allowed, and travel
pocket. Yes restores. (Multiple Z axes leveling)

Prompt “|Y| Warning: Tool unclamp signal feeds

S p i n d l e t o o l u n c l a m p No out, wait for 200ms, and Whether to run ATC Yes
signal detection times detect in-position signal of subroutine in MDI?
out”, program ends. tool unclamp
No

Spindle starts (Spindle ON)

Complete

Fig. 3-99 Process of Auto Tool Change for A Linear Tool Magazine

Software Operation「131」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.20.2 Auto Tool Change for A Circular Tool Magazine

Circular tool magazine, or called disk-type tool magazine, stores more than 8 tools and occupies large
space on most occasions. It is usually mounted on the upper end of the column or side of the spindle. In
general software, the system takes circular tool magazine mounted on X-axis by default, as shown
below.

Circular tool magazine

(The system takes the tool magazine fixed on X-axis by default)

Fig. 3-100 An Example of Circular Tool Magazine

When a machine tool is with the function of a circular tool magazine and auto tool change is needed
during file machining, the process of auto tool change is as following:

「132」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Start

Prompt “|R| Not returned No

to the machine origin”, Have returned to the machine
program ends. origin?
Z-axis moves to CTUP position
Yes

No Magazine pocket rotates to target

Error prompt Is tool No. legal?
tool No.
Yes
P r o m p t “ | Y | S e t No Z-axis moves to CTDOWN position
Are tool clamp/unclamp
parameter [Para.name] related parameters enabled?
first”, program ends.
Yes Change tool No.

Prompt “|Y| No tool in the No Is tool clamp confirm signal

spindle”, program ends. detected? Prompt “|Y| Warning:
Tool clamp signal feeds out, No Spindle tool clamp signal
Yes wait for 200ms, and detect in-
position signal of tool clamp detection times out”,
Switch to ATC travel limit, and tool program ends.
lift at pause inhibited (Switch to
multiple Z axes independent Yes
movement mode) X-axis moves to ATC ahead
position, and goes out magazine
pocket with target tool
Spindle stops (Spindle OFF)

Z-axis moves to CTUP position

Can tool magazine be pulled No

X-axis moves to ATC ahead in?
position
Yes

Tool magazine pulled in

Can tool magazine be No
pushed out?

Yes No
Whether to calibrate
Tool magazine pushed out automatically?

Yes

Magazine pocket rotates to current Execute fixed calibration?

tool No.

Z-axis moves to CTDOWN position Tool lift at pause allowed, and travel
restores. (Multiple Z axes leveling)

X-axis moves to changing tool

position, and goes into magazine
pocket. Yes Whether to run ATC Yes
subroutine in MDI?
Prompt “|Y| Warning: Tool unclamp signal feeds
S p i n d l e t o o l u n c l a m p No out, wait for 200ms, and No
signal detection times detect in-position signal of
out”, program ends. tool unclamp Spindle starts (Spindle ON)

Complete

Fig. 3-101 Process of Auto Tool Change for A Circular Tool Magazine

Software Operation「133」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

3.20.3 Auto Tool Change for A Servo Tool Magazine

Servo tool magazine stores tools in form of disk-type magazine, with 16 tools distributed evenly. Rotation
of the magazine is controlled by A-axis, whose rotation is controlled by servo motor. In general software,
the system takes the magazine mounted on X-axis by default.
The process of tool change of servo tool magazine is shown as below:

Start

Prompt “|R| Not returned No

Have returned to the machine
to the machine origin”, origin?
program ends.
Z-axis moves to CTUP position
Yes

No Magazine pocket rotates to target

Error prompt Is tool No. legal?
tool No.
Yes
P r o m p t “ | Y | S e t No Z-axis moves to CTDOWN position
Are tool clamp/unclamp
parameter [Para.name]
related parameters enabled?
first”, program ends.
Yes Change tool No.

Prompt “|Y| No tool in the No Is tool clamp confirm signal

spindle”, program ends. detected? Prompt “|Y| Warning:
Tool clamp signal feeds out, No Spindle tool clamp signal
Yes wait for 200ms, and detect in-
position signal of tool clamp detection times out”,
Switch to ATC travel limit, and tool program ends.
lift at pause inhibited (Switch to
multiple Z axes independent Yes
movement mode) Y-axis moves to ATC ahead
position, and goes out magazine
pocket with target tool
Spindle stops (Spindle OFF)

Z-axis moves to CTUP position

Can tool magazine be pulled No

Y-axis moves to ATC ahead in?
position, and X-axis to current tool
position Yes

Tool magazine pulled in

Can tool magazine be No
pushed out?

Yes No
Whether to calibrate
Tool magazine pushed out automatically?

Yes

Execute fixed calibration?

Z-axis moves to CTDOWN position

Y-axis moves to changing tool

position, and goes into magazine Tool lift at pause allowed, and travel
pocket. Yes restores. (Multiple Z axes leveling)

Prompt “|Y| Warning: Tool unclamp signal feeds

S p i n d l e t o o l u n c l a m p No out, wait for 200ms, and Whether to run ATC Yes
signal detection times detect in-position signal of subroutine in MDI?
out”, program ends. tool unclamp
No

Spindle starts (Spindle ON)

Complete

Fig. 3-102 Process of Auto Tool Change for A Servo Tool Magazine

「134」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

CAUTION
When a servo tool magazine is activated,
1) A-axis stays motionless during process of returning to the fixed point or work zero;
2) When making all axes returning to the machine origin, A-axis is excluded;
3) Homing or returning status of A-axis will not be checked before machining.

3.20.4 Prompt for Tool Change

Prompts may pop up during the process of tool change, please refer to table below for details and
countermeasures.
Table 3-4 Tool Change Prompts and Countermeasures

Prompt Type Content Countermeasure

|R| Prompt in Return all axes to the machine
|R| Not returned to the machine origin
red background origin.
|Y| Current tool No. is illegal Set correct tool No.
Check following two aspects:
1) Is parameter setting for
|Y| Target tool No. is illegal magazine capacity correct?
2) Is there any error in T
command?
This prompt may appear in
multi-Z configuration. Ensure
|Y| Current tool No. of Z1 and Z2 are different correctness of tool No. first and
then set same value for Z1 and
|Y| Prompt in Z2.
yellow |Y| Please set parameter[Name] first Correctly set the parameter.
background Check following three aspects:
1) Tool has been well placed
in the spindle;
|Y| No tool in the spindle, cannot change tool 2) Tool clamp signal port
works well;
3) Wiring of tool clamp signal
port is correct.
|Y| In-position signal of dust cover not Check in-position signal port of
detected or it fell, please check! dust cover and its wiring.
Check in-position signal port of
|Y| Warning: in-position detection of
tool magazine pushed-out and

Software Operation「135」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Prompt Type Content Countermeasure

magazine pushed-out time out its wiring.
|Y| Warning: spindle tool unclamp signal Check tool unclamp signal port
detection time out and its wiring.
|Y| Warning: spindle tool clamp signal Check tool clamp signal port
detection time out and its wiring.
|Y| Warning: in-position detection of
Check the port and its wiring.
magazine pulled-in time out
|M| Prompt Check following two aspects:
without |M| Tool No. of target tool and current tool are
1) Is the tool correct?
background the same
color 2) Is T command repeated?

3.20.5 Parameter Specifications

Here are parameters related to auto tool change.

Class Parameter Details Setting Range

Z-axis machine coordinate when a
N66005 Upper Position tool moves to tool magazine for -99999~99999
tool change, or CTUP position
Z-axis machine coordinate of tool
change position when a tool
N66006 Lower Position -99999~99999
moves downwards from Upper
Position, or CTDOWN position
Machine coordinate value of
Common Parameters

N66017~ Deceleration
spindle position before tool -99999~100000
N66018 Position X/Y
change

Feedrate in Tool Movement speed of spindle during

N66028 0~100000
Changing tool change
Feedrate in The moving speed of the spindle
Moving from Upper from the upper position to the
N66029 0~60000
Position to Lower lower position in Z direction during
Position tool changing.
Automatic Tool Whether to execute auto tool NO: Not execute
N66030
Measure measurement after tool change YES: To execute
0: Null;
Tool Magazine
N66031 1: Disk Tool Magazine 0; 1; 2; 3
Type
2: Linear Tool Magazine

「136」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Class Parameter Details Setting Range

3: Servo Tool Magazine (only
available for A-type of 4 axes
configuration)
Tool Magazine
N66032 The capacity of tool magazine 1~255
Capacity
YES: The tool
number must be
within (0, 256) in tool
change command.
Check Change Whether to check tool number in
N66033 NO: The range of the
ToolNo tool change is proper or not
tool number is not
limited, and the tool
number remains the
same.
Tool Unclamp
PLC address of spindle in-position
N66045 In-position Signal NA
signal port when unclamping tool.
Port
Tool Clamp PLC address of spindle in-position
N66046 NA
In-position Signal signal port when clamping tool.
PLC address of the external signal
External Tool
N66047 port for controlling over tool NA
Control Signal Port
clamp/unclamp.
Output Port of Tool PLC address of output port for
N66048 NA
Unclamp/Clamp spindle unclamping/clamping tool.
Output Port of PLC address of output port for tool
N66049 -
Mag. Out magazine ejecting out.
Change Tool Machine coordinate value of
N67000~
Workbench Range worktable stroke lower limit of /
N67002
Lower Limit X/Y/Z X/Y/Z during tool change
Change Tool Machine coordinate value of
N67010~
Workbench Range worktable stroke upper limit of /
N67012
Upper Limit X/Y/Z X/Y/Z during tool change
This group of parameters sets the worktable stroke range for tool change to avoid tool
damage caused by over travel during tool change.
Tool
Linear Magazine

Position
(X)
The machine coordinates of T1. -99999~99999
Tool
Position
(Y)

Software Operation「137」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Class Parameter Details Setting Range

N66007~ Spindle Position in Position for the spindle to
-99999~99999
N66008 Tool Change clamp/unclamp tool in tool change.
PLC address of the tool counting
N66036 Tool Count Port NA
port.
PLC address of disk-type
Tool Mag. Back to
N66037 magazine back to magazine origin NA
Origin Port
port.
PLC address of disk-type
N66038 Tool Mag. CW Port NA
magazine CW rotation port.
Circular Magazine

Tool Mag. CCW PLC address of disk-type

N66039 NA
Port magazine CCW rotation port.
OFF delay when magazine rotates
Tool Count CW
N66040 to the last pocket in CW direction 0~5000
Delay
during tool counting.
OFF delay when magazine rotates
Tool Count CCW
N66041 to the last pocket in CCW direction 0~5000
Delay
during tool counting.
Delayed time of the port when
Mag. CW to Origin
N66042 magazine turns to origin in 0~5000
Delay
clockwise direction.
Delayed time of the port when
Mag. CCW to
N66043 magazine turns to origin in counter 0~5000
Origin Delay
clockwise direction.
Magazine

It refers to the rotational speed of

Servo

Servo Magazine
N66050 servo tool magazine in tool change 0~100000
Rotate Speed
or magazine CW/CCW rotation.

If parameter N66031 is set to ―NULL‖, tool change action will not be execute when T
command is encountered, and only tool No. will be modified.
Setting value of parameter N66032 should be consistence with actual magazine capacity of
Comment

the machine.
In case of linear tool magazine, each tool has its own position.
In case of disk-type tool magazine, there may be deviation between the position where
current tool stops in tool counting and the position of tool clamping. In order to minimize this
kind of error, parameters N66040~66043 can be enabled.

CAUTION
Since the machine structures of tool magzines vary, the above tool change flow charts apply only for general
situations. Please contact with the manufacturer for part adjustment if the actual operation is diiferent fron the
operation described above.

「138」Software Operation
Specialized Concentrated Focused

4 Introduction to Multi-Z Axes Software

4.1 Configuration Selection .......................................................................................................................140
4.1.1 “Union” Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 140
4.1.2 “Turn” Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 142

4.2 Tool Measurement ...............................................................................................................................142

4.3 Related Parameters..............................................................................................................................143

Introduction to Multi-Z Axes Software「139」

Specialized Concentrated Focused

This chapter focuses on introduction to operations of multi-Z axes software, especially to the difference
compared with integral software.

4.1 Configuration Selection

Used together with multi-Z axes software, NK300CX can be a good solution to multiple Z axes motion
control.
At present, ―Union‖ configuration (also known as linkage configuration) and ―Turn‖ configuration (also
called alternative configuration) are supported. Similar to configuration switchover method in integral
software, you can turn to 「System」 interface under [System] functional area to open a dialog box
named ―Config Manager‖, where you can select configuration. Note that the software needs to be
restarted to activate target configuration.

4.1.1 “Union” Configuration

Fig. 4-1 「Coor」 interface under linkage configuration

With linkage configuration activated, as shown on above figure, both Z1-axis and Z2-axis are active.

 Axis Switchover

As shown in Fig. 4-1, pressing F4 ―Switch Axis‖ button opens a subdivision manipulation button bar.
F1~F3 correspond to ―Select Z1‖, ―Select Z2‖ and ―Select Z1Z2‖ respectively.
Note that if any type of tool magazine has been used, the system will detect in-position signal of tool
clamp port of to-be-activated Z-axis, and prompt shown in yellow background will appear once the signal
is not detected.
When switching Z-axis, Z1/Z2-axis will move to a safe position ―Positive travel limit-1‖ first before
activation of target axis. There are three situations in this process, as follows.

「140」Introduction to Multi-Z Axes Software

Specialized Concentrated Focused

1) When Z1-axis is the target axis, the spindle stops first, and if Z2-axis has returned to the machine
origin, Z2-axis moves to the position defined by parameter setting; if Z2-axis hasn‘t returned to the
machine origin, Z2-axis stands still. At last, Z1-axis will be activated, and Z2-axis remains inactive.
2) When Z2-axis is the target axis, the spindle stops first, and if Z1-axis has returned to the machine
origin, Z1-axis moves to the position defined by parameter setting; if Z1-axis hasn‘t returned to the
machine origin, Z1-axis stands still. At last, Z2-axis will be activated and Z1-axis remains inactive.
3) When Z1Z2 axes need to be activated together, the spindle stops first, and if both Z axes have
returned to the machine origin and parameter N75400 ―Auto Leveling Z Axes‖ is set to ―Yes‖,
automatic leveling will be executed.
Auto leveling Z axes, as name implies, Z1Z2 axes will be adjusted to be same in terms of workpiece
coordinates in Z direction. When automatic leveling is to be executed, final position of Z-axis is affected
by the positive travel limit.
1) If the final position is lower than positive travel limit, Z1/Z2-axis will move to the position of larger
coordinate with priority.
2) If the final position exceeds positive travel limit, Z1/Z2-axis will move the limit position.

 Multiple Z Axes Automatic Leveling

If both Z1Z2 axes are to be activated, the system will adopt prior strategy of moving up to make their Z
coordinates the same. That is, leveling Z1Z2 axes automatically.
As shown in Fig. 4-1, press to turn to next manipulation button bar, as shown below. Press F5 ―Leveling‖
to enable auto leveling function get the same workpiece coordinate in Z direction of both Z1Z2 axes.

Fig. 4-2 Auto leveling Z axes

Introduction to Multi-Z Axes Software「141」

Specialized Concentrated Focused

4.1.2 “Turn” Configuration

Fig. 4-3 「Coor」 interface under alternative configuration

With alternative configuration active, ―Select Z1Z2‖ is unavailable. To put it in other words, there will be
only one active Z-axis in any moment.
As shown in Fig. 4-3, press F1 or F2 to activate the target Z-axis. Current Z-axis will move to the position
defined by parameter ―Z1/Z2 position at axis switch‖ before activation of the target Z-axis. For instance,
current Z-axis being Z1, and Z2-axis to be selected, Z1-axis will move to the position of ―Z1 position at
axis switch‖, and Z2-axis will be activated, namely, switching Z1-axis to Z2-axis.
With alternative configuration active, the machine will do following actions before T command execution,
taking changing T1 to T2 as an example.
1) If any type of tool magazine is used, tool clamping signal of Z1 and Z2 axes as well as related
parameter settings will be detected firstly. The system will give yellow prompt if detection is negative
and the program execution will be terminated.
2) Z1 and Z2 axes move to the position set by the parameters.
3) Z1-axis is deactivated and Z2-axis is to be activated.

4.2 Tool Measurement

Similar with that in integral software, tool measurement in multi-Z axes software is divided into mobile
calibration, fixed calibration and first time/after changed calibration as well. Main difference lies in
calibration process of an addition Z-axis. For this reason, please refer to section 4.2 for detailed
information of calibration process. Here are corresponding calibration interfaces in multi-Z axes software,
for reference only.

「142」Introduction to Multi-Z Axes Software

Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 4-4 Mobile calibration dialog box of multi-Z software

Fig. 4-5 Fixed calibration dialog box of multi-Z software

Fig. 4-6 First time/after TC calibration of multi-Z software

4.3 Related Parameters

On basis of parameters of integral software, there are some parameters exclusively owned by multi-Z
axes software. Refer to following table for details.

Parameter Meaning Range

N41010 Auto Draining Whether to drain automatically. 1: Yes; 0: No
Auto Draining
N41011 The interval between twice drainage. 3.6~300000 sec
Interval
Auto Draining
N41012 The duration of each automatic drainage. 1-100
Duration
N62090 G09 tolerance Size of G09 exact stop window. 0~99mm
N64244 Optimize Whether to make performance 1: Yes; 0: No

Introduction to Multi-Z Axes Software「143」

Specialized Concentrated Focused

Parameter Meaning Range

Performance optimization or not.
If yes, the machine automatically moves to
Automatic Tool the fixed tool presetter and conduct tool
N66037 1: Yes; 0: No
Measurement calibration when T command is being
executed.
Z-axis lifting mode on pause. 0. Lift to the
position set by parameter; 1. Lift to the
Z-axis Lifting
N73002 workpiece coordinate set by parameter; 2. 0; 1; 2
Mode on Pause
Lift to the machine coordinate set by
parameter.
Z1 presetter
The PLC address of the input port of tool
N75002 input port
presetter signal. For alternative calibration
address -
of multiple Z axes, only Z1 signal will be
Z2 presetter
N75003 used.
input port Addr
ToolMea The PLC address of input port on I/O
N75024 Overtravel Port terminal board, where the system gets -
Addr overtravel signal from the presetter.
ToolMea Alarm will occur when overtravel in tool
N75025 1: Yes; 0: No
Overtravel Alarm calibration.
0: several tool probes available, multiple Z
axes conduct tool measurement
Tool calibration simultaneously.
N75026 0; 1
type 1: only one tool probe available, multiple Z
axes conduct tool measurement
alternately.
Z1 Pos when The machine coordinates of Z1 while
N79401 -100~0mm
change spindle switching spindle.
Z2 Pos when The machine coordinates of Z1 while
N79402 -100~0mm
change spindle switching spindle.
Whether to switch to Z1 when task ends.
N79403 Switch to Z1 1: Yes; 0: No
Only used in alternative configuration.
Z1Z2 Distance between Z1 and Z2 axes in X
N79404 -9999~9999mm
Spacing-Offset X direction.
Z1Z2 Distance between Z1 and Z2 axes in Y
N79405 -9999~9999mm
Spacing-Offset Y direction.

「144」Introduction to Multi-Z Axes Software

Specialized Concentrated Focused

5 Maintenance
5.1 Operation System Maintenance ...........................................................................................................146
5.1.1 Preparation ............................................................................................................................................ 146
5.1.2 Creating OS Startup Disk ........................................................................................................................ 146
5.1.3 OS Restoration ....................................................................................................................................... 147
5.1.4 Backup OS to USB disk ........................................................................................................................... 148
5.1.5 Backup and Restoration of the Integrated System ................................................................................. 149

5.2 NcStudio System Maintenance ............................................................................................................152

5.3 Warning Information ...........................................................................................................................156

5.4 Common Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................159

Maintenance「145」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

5.1 Operation System Maintenance

When you receive product NK300CX, it is ready for use with all systems installed and setup. If any
failure occurs, you can restore the software to leaving-factory state.

5.1.1 Preparation
1) An USB flash disk (above 1G);
2) The backup and restore toolkit

5.1.2 Creating OS Startup Disk

 Creating an USB Startup Disk
You can create an USB startup disk which will help the system access DOS interface, backup and
restore the system SSD with DOS tools in the USB disk.
Steps to create USB startup disk are as follows:
1) Insert an USB into the PC, and double click file ―HPUSBFW.EXE" in file folder ―hpUpgsh‖ on the
desktop of PC. An interface shown as below will appear.

Fig. 5-1 USB Format Tool

 Under ―Device‖, select the USB flash disk which needs to be formatted;
 The default for ―File system‖ is FAT32;
 Select items ―Quick Format‖ and ―Create a DOS startup disk;
 Below the item ―using DOS system files located…‖, specify and locate the path
―Desktop\hpUpgsh\boot‖;
 Click ―Start‖ to initiate formatting. After two successive confirmations, creation of USB startup
disk is successfully completed.

「146」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

2) On the desktop of PC, double click file ―USB backup and restore tool kit‖, and interface shown
as Figure 5-1 will appear.

Figure 5-1 USB Restore Tool Kit

3) Locate the USB startup disk which has been created successfully in the target file box, and then
click ―Install‖. After installation, all files contained in ―USB backup and restore tool kit‖ will be
unzipped into this USB.
4) Conduct anti-virus check on the USB to secure it is safe from viruses.

5.1.3 OS Restoration
Operating system restoration is the mirror image installation of the system SSD. An USB setup disk and
a system SSD will be needed.
1) Insert the USB flash disk to the USB slot.
2) Restart the system, and press [Delete] key to enter BIOS interface. Accessing ―BootHard
Drive BBS PrioritiesBoot Option #1‖, and set USB setup disk as ―Boot Option #1‖.
3) After setting start orders, press F4 to save the setting and restart. After normal startup, interface
shown as below will appear.

Maintenance「147」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 5-2 DOS Startup Interface

 Enter ―1‖, and an interface shown as Fig. 5-3 DOS Confirmation Interface will appear.

Fig. 5-3 DOS Confirmation Interface

 Enter ―1‖ again, and the system will execute Ghost restoration. Pull out the USB disk the
moment the system restarts. System installation is completed.

5.1.4 Backup OS to USB disk

Steps to back up operation system to USB disk are as follows.
1) Insert the USB flash disk to the USB slot.
2) Restart the system, and press [Delete] key to enter BIOS interface. Accessing ―BootHard
Drive BBS PrioritiesBoot Option #1‖, and set USB setup disk as ―Boot Option #1‖.
3) After setting start orders, press F4 to save the setting and restart. After normal startup, interface
shown as below will appear.

「148」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 5-4 DOS Startup Interface

4) Enter ―2  back  2‖, and the system will conduct Ghost backup process. Pull out the USB
disk and turn off the power when the process finishes. System backup is completed.

5.1.5 Backup and Restoration of the Integrated System

You can use ―Windows Ghost‖ Restoration function to restore the system when problems occur. Backup
of operating system of NK300CX has been completed before leaving factory. In addition, the software
has also been installed in CNC system, but its backup is not done in CNC system. We suggest that you
immediately back up the BIOS system and the software again the first time the machine is power on or
after debugging is completed.
 System Re-Backup
Steps to back up the system again are as follows.
1) Power on the machine, access the operating system choice interface, and select ―Windows
Ghost‖, as shown in Fig. 5-5.

Please select the operating system to start:

Microsoft Windows XP Professional

Windows Ghost

Use the up and down arrow keys to move the highlight to your choice.
Press ENTER to choose.

For troubleshooting and advanced startup options for Windows, press F8.

Fig. 5-5 Select “Windows Ghost” operating system

2) It jumps to restoration confirmation interface, as shown below.

Maintenance「149」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Windows Ghost Confirm Restoring

To be restored with backup on 2015-05-2.

Restore Cancel

Fig. 5-6 Restoration confirmation

3) Press [Cancel] to access ―Windows Ghost‖ interface, as shown in Fig. 5-7. Press ―2‖ to select
re-backup option.

Windows Ghost

Main Menu

1 Restore
2 Re-Backup
3 Ghost

MS-DOS Reboot

Fig. 5-7 “Window Ghost” interface

4) A re-backup confirmation dialog box will appear, as shown in Fig. 5-8.

Windows Ghost Confirm Backup

Image file will be recovered which is backuped on 2015-05-2.

Backup Cancel

Fig. 5-8 Re-backup confirmation

5) Press [Backup] for confirmation. And the interface jumps to re-backup progressing interface.
When re-backup finishes, the system will be restarted automatically.
 System Restoration
After re-backing up the system, if you need to use windows ghost restoration function, you can select ―1
Restoration‖ in a dialog box shown as Fig. 5-6 or Fig. 5-7. And you can restore the system as directed.
Note that if you use windows ghost restoration function while you have not re-back up the system, the
system will be re-started automatically. A dialog box titled with ―FirstRun‖ will pop up noticing you that
you should install the software, as shown in Fig. 5-9 and Fig. 5-10. You can select a disk to install the
software as directed.

「150」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 5-9 FirstRun Notice 1

Fig. 5-10 FirstRun Notice 2

CAUTION
1) When exceptions occur during NcStudio system backup and restoration, you should consider the following
causes at priority.
 Is the guidance order of hardware in BIOS correct?
 Is there any problem occurred during system backup?
 Is the storage of USB disk enough during system backup?
 The backup progress will exit automatically if image file exists in the USB disk.
 During system backup, if there is mirror image file in USB disk, the process will exit.
To avoid the problems listed above, it is recommended that you conduct system disk security check and rerpair
before proceeding with system backup and restoration. Otherwise, system performance may be influenced. So as
data disk.
 Do not power off the PC during backup of NcStudio system. Otherwise, the system can be damaged.
 When the prompt about installing software in FirstRun dialog box appears, only .exe file is supported.
Compressed files of format such as .zip, .rar are not supported. They must be unzipped for installation.

Maintenance「151」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

5.2 NcStudio System Maintenance

5.2.1 Package and Update

Software backup function is supported in NcStudio system. When software installation completes and
parameters corresponding to a machine tool are set, you can pack up and back up the software with
parameter settings as the original data. And the backup software can be directly installed on a machine
tool of the same type. The function is realized in system maintenance. Steps to pack up and backup
software are shown as follows.

When the system is in idle state, press to enter the [System] functional area, and then press
button F2 ―System Maint.‖ to enter the system maintenance screen, as shown in Fig. 5-11.

Fig. 5-11 System Maintenance- Upgrade Software

Maintenance type includes update software and update common software. The default is ―Update
software‖. Select ―Update software‖, and the current parameters can be saved after the software is
updated. Select ―Update Common File‖ and then you can select Public, Plc, Amend, String files in ―File
List‖ for backup, which is only valid for the current configuration. Fig. 5-11 is the dialog box for ―Update
software‖. In updating software,
 Select Disk
Press F1 ―Select Disk‖, and an input box for entering the drive letter of the removable disk with the
update package will pop up. Select the disk where you will save the update package. Then all software
update package in the disk will show in ―File List‖.
 Packup
Press F2 ―Packup‖ to pack the current software automatically and save the packed software to the

「152」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

selected disk.
 Update
Press key ―↑‖ or ―↓‖ to move the cursor and press space key to select the software , and then press F7
―Update‖ to start software installation. If the file cannot be opened normally, please refer to 5.2.2 for
detailed installation information.

Fig. 5-12 Public File Upgrade

 Select Disk
Press F1 ―Select Disk‖, and an input box for entering the drive letter of the removable disk with the
update package will pop up. Select the disk where you will save the update package. Then all files in the
disk will show in ―File List‖, including Public, Plc, Amend, and String files.
 Export
Pressing F2, and the system will automatically export the public file under current configuration to USB
disk. Prompt for successful exportation will pop up if export process completes.
 Select File
Press key ―↑‖ or ―↓‖ to move the cursor and press F4 to select the file. Check in the check box in front
of the common files you need to update. You can update several files each time.
 Update
Press F7 to update. After confirmation, upgrading succeeds after restart the system.
If the public files to upgrade contains amend.dat file, before final upgrading, a prompt dialog box will pop
up, as shown below. Choose ―Yes‖ to confirm and continue updating and choose ―No‖ to cancel it.

Maintenance「153」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 5-13 Prompt Before amend.dat File Updating

CAUTION
Function “Update Common File” is only enabled for the current configuration.

5.2.2 Software Installation

Steps to install software are shown as follows:
1) Accessing the desktop. Press combination key ―Ctrl + Alt + Delete‖ to enter the task manager
interface ==> press ―Alt + F‖ key to select ―New Task‖ ==> in the new task dialog, input
―explorer‖ and press ―Enter‖ ==> press ―Alt + Tab‖ to switch to NcStudio ==> press ―Alt + F4‖ to
close it and enter the desktop.

2) Insert the USB flash disk with the software NK300CX into the USB slot on the operation panel
of NK300CX host. Access the desktop as directed in step 1. Find the software to install in [My
Computer] and double click it to initiate installation. The first dialog box popping up is about
language selection, as shown in Fig. 4 8. Switchover between languages while the software is
running is supported in NcStudio. Choose the interface language you need.

Fig. 5-14 Language Selection Dialog Box

3) To avoid the interference of old version software to the current software installation, before
formal installation begins, a prompting dialog box about saving previous parameter setting will
pop up, as shown in Fig. 4 9. Choose ―Yes‖ to save the parameters and delete the old version
software before current software installation begins.

「154」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 5-15 Prompt for parameter saving

4) Click [确定] (means [Yes]) to continue. If software of other version has been installed before and
its parameters have been modified, there will be a prompt dialog box for confirmation of
parameter settings saving, as shown below. Note that if it is the first time to install the software,
this prompt will be omitted. Jump to step 5) directly to go ahead.

Fig. 5-16 Prompt for parameter settings saving

5) Click [是] (means [Yes]). The system will be installed under directory C:\Naiky. Installation
progress is shown in progress bar, as shown in below.

Fig. 5-17 Installation progressing

6) Software installation is completed.

Maintenance「155」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

CAUTION
The above installation introduction is for situation where the software has been damaged and cannot work
normally. If the software can be launched normally, please refer to 4.2.2 to upgrade software instead of newly
installing one.

5.3 Warning Information

Type Warning Content Causes Solution

―Simulation results The scope of machining file Modify the value of

showed that the exceeds upper and lower ―N10020‖ and ―N10030‖ to
motion of the limits of worktable, decided expand stroke range of
program exceeded by setting ―N10020‖& worktable (see section
machining bounds.‖ ―N10030‖. 3.3.3).

The system has not returned

―Returning machine to machine origin yet. If
Back to machine origin
home was not ―N74001‖ is set to ―YES‖,
before using this function.
finished!‖ returning to machine origin
before machining is required.

An error in the precision of Detect the precision of

―The result error of
home switch home switch.
returning machine
Warning home for X/Y/Z-axis
An error in the precision of Detect if the system encoder
was out of range‖
encoder origin zero signal is correct.

An illegal operation is
―Unable to perform Stop machining, and
executed in machining, such
the action under the execute the operation under
as changing the setting of a
current mode‖ idle state.
parameter.

An illegal operation is
―Unable to perform executed in simulation Quit simulation mode, and
the action under mode, such as changing the execute the operation under
simulation mode‖ setting of a parameter or idle state.
pressing a shortcut key

「156」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Type Warning Content Causes Solution

Enter [I/O Port] screen

The polarity of port
under [Diagnosis], and
Positive/Negative Limit of
modify the port polarity
X-/Y-/Z-axis is not right.
(refer to section 3.2).

Limit ―Limit of
X-/Y-/Z-axis runs into the
X+/X-/Y+/Y-/Z+/Z-‖ Manually move X-/Y-/Z-axis
alarm limit switch directly in
away from the limit switch.
movement.

There is an error in the limit Check if the limit switch

switch itself. works normally.

The actual installation Re-adjust the actual position

―The distance of
distance between coarse of home switch and encoder
Back to coarse/fine
and fine positioning switches zero to make the space
positioning switch for
REF. point is smaller than the setting within the range (0 +
X/Y/Z-axis was too
alarm value of parameter ―N74110‖, screw pitch –
close‖
―N74110‖. ―N74110‖) (see section 3.2).

Enter [I/O Port] screen

The polarity of port Axis under [Diagnosis], and
X/Y/Z Servo Alarm is wrong. modify the port polarity
Servo ―Servo alarm of
(refer to section 3.2).
X/Y/Z-axis‖
alarm
There is an error in the Check if the X/Y/Z-axis
X/Y/Z-axis servo driver itself. servo driver works normally.

Enter [I/O Port] screen

The polarity of port under [Diagnosis], and
Emergency Stop is wrong. modify the port polarity
E-stop ―ESTOP button
(refer to section 3.2).
pressed‖
alarm
The E-stop button is pressed Turn the E-stop button
down. clockwise to make it pop-up.

Enter [I/O Port] screen

The polarity of port
under [Diagnosis], and
Lubrication Position Test
Oil ―lube level low alarm‖ modify the port polarity (see
Alarm is wrong.
level alarm section 3.2).

When the oil level line in the Check if the oil mass is too

Maintenance「157」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Type Warning Content Causes Solution

oil pump is below a certain small in the oil pump.

value, a signal will be sent to
the system to give an alarm.

Enter [I/O Port] screen

The polarity of port Spindle under [Diagnosis], and
Alarm is wrong. modify the port polarity (see
―Spindle alarm‖ section 3.2).
Spindle
alarm
There is an error in the Check if the inverter works
inverter. normally.

File ―Machining program Start file machining with no Load a machining file in
not loaded yet‖ file loaded in advance. advance.
error

―Axis X/Y/Z Encoder It is used to detect if the

Pulse Steady/Dynamic D-value between sent pulses Check if the servo system is
Error‖; ―Axis X/Y/Z and received pulses exceeds stable or if the motor
feedback
Serious Following the setting value of the encoder is damaged.
alarm
Error‖ corresponding parameter.

Check if the tool presetter

works normally.

During tool changing, Z-axis

keeps moving downward for
Alarm signal occurs in tool
Alarm for over-travel receiving no calibration
Change tool change over-travel
in tool change signal, and triggers the
over-travel protection port
over-travel protection port.
alarm
Hardware faulty, which may
result in continuous signal of
the port.

Re-plug the connection wire

and restart the software.
The terminal board is
Terminal Wiring is not well or Something wrong with the
not well connected
hardware fault of Lambda port polarity. Invert the
board not with the NK300CX
controller. polarity and restart the
connected system
software.

Analyze possible causes

「158」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Type Warning Content Causes Solution

according to the state of

SYSTEM LED indicator.

Change a new Lambda

controller.

Something wrong with the

port polarity. Invert the
Something wrong with the polarity and restart the
Panel port polarity. software.
Operational panel is
not not well connected Wiring is not well. Re-plug the connection wire
connected and restart the software.
Operation panel fault.
change a new operational
panel.

CAUTION
Some alarms shown in table above are alarms added for the the machine structure of of a machine tool, and it is
not discribed in general warning information. Please consult with the machine tool manufacturer if you have any
questions.

5.4 Common Troubleshooting

5.4.1 What should you do if the spindle does not rotate?

1) Start the spindle, and check whether the spindle start indicator lamp on the controller is on.
2) If the lamp is on, measure whether the SPIN port, i.e. port Y00 in integral software, or port
Y03/Y0 in multi-Z-axis embedded software, is conducted with a multimeter. If the port is
conducted and works normally, check whether the parameter setting of the inverter is right,
whether the spindle and the inverter have been damaged, or whether the wiring of the spindle
and the inverter is correct.

3) If the lamp is off, close the host machine and power off the machine tool, and then re-plug the
connection cable on the controller. If it still does not light up, please change the Lambda
controller or the NK300CX host machine.

5.4.2 What should you do if an axis does not move?

1) Check whether the polarity of output port ―Servo Enable of any axis‖, in [Port(3)] screen under
[Diagnosis] is correct. Normally it should be ―NO‖.

Maintenance「159」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

2) Check whether the parameters about the servo driver, including control mode, pulse input form,
and electronic gear ratio, are set correctly. The control mode should be set as position control.
The pulse input form should be pulse+direction.
3) Check whether the servo cable of this axis is well connected with the system host machine and
the servo driver.
4) Check whether the motor is enabled.
5) Move the machine tool manually, and check whether the driver receives pulses. If it receives
pulses and the machine tool has no output, check the transmission is loose. If it does not
receive pulses, please change the host machine or the driver.

5.4.3 What should you do if servo motor brake in Z-axis does

not work?
1) Check whether there is signal in input port ―Brake‖. If there is no signal, check whether servo
driver is enabled, and whether the parameter about brake of servo driver is set correctly.
2) If there is signal, remove the cables connecting with output port brake, Y00-C00, start the
system, power on the machine tool with system alarm signal removed, and measure whether
the port is conducted with a multimeter.
3) Power off the machine tool, reconnect the two cables, and reconnect the 24V power in the
former circuit. Power on and measure whether there is 24V voltage between the ends of the
brake cable with a multimeter. If there is 24V voltage, the motor is damaged.
4) If the brake still does not work, please change the Lambda controller.

5.4.4 What should you do if homing is abnormal?

1. Limit alarm or servo driver alarm appears during homing, i.e. backing to machine origin.

1) Press button to enter the [Diagnosis] functional area, press key ―3‖ to open the [Port]
interface. Make sure the polarity of input port ―Reference Point of n-axis‖ is in accordance with
the signal type of the port. ―NO‖ represents ―nomally open‖, and ―NC‖ represents ―normally
close‖.
2) Move the machine tool to home switch position manually. Check whether the color of the dot in
front of the ―Reference Point of n axis‖ changes from red to green. If there is no color change,
the software can‘t receive the reference point signal. Check if there is any problem in the home
switch or in the wiring of home switch. To check whether the system failure occurs, conduct the
reference point signal with COM port on the controller with a conducting wire, and check
whether the color of the dot before ―Reference Point of × axis‖ changes.
3) Enter [Axis(2)] interface of [Parameter] functional area, and check whether parameter ―Coarse
Positioning Dir.‖, ―Fine Positioning Dir.‖ and ―Back Off Distance‖ are set correctly. The
direction of parameter ―Fine Positioning Dir.‖ should be the same as that of parameter ―Back Off
Distance‖, and opposite to the direction of ―Coarse Positioning Dir.‖.
4) Check whether the position of home switch is appropriate to avoid the following three situations:
the distance between home switch and limit switch is too short; the home switch is installed

「160」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

behind the limit switch; or the position of home switch is out of the mechanical stroke of a
machine tool.
2. When backing to machine origin, the machine tool motions towards a certain direction at a relatively
low speed (ten percent of the speed of coarse positioning) until limit is triggered.

Press button to enter the [Diagnosis] functional area, press key ―3‖ to open the [Port]
interface. Check whether the polarity of input port ―Reference Point of n-axis‖ is correct]. When
the home switch is triggered, i.e., when there is an input signal, the dot in front of the port
number should be green. Otherwise, it is red.
3. A certain axis moves a very long distance at a rather low speed or keeps moving in the opposite
direction after coarse positioning during backing to machine origin.
The reason why the above problem occurs is that the system can‘t detect zero signal of the encoder
on the axis. The solutions are as below.
1) Move the machine tool manually, and check whether there is any signal on input port ―Encoder
Zero of n-axis‖ in [Port] interface.
2) Check whether the servo cable of this axis is well connected with the system host machine and
servo driver.
3) Check whether there is any problem in the driver, motor, encoder cable, servo cable, and the
control system. e.g., you can exchange the servo cable and the servo driver separately with
those of axes which return to machine origin normally.

5.4.5 What should you do if a machine tool moves upward

after arriving at the position of tool presetter during tool
presetting?

1) Press button to enter the [Diagnosis] functional area, press key ―3‖ to open the [Port]
interface. Check whether the ploarity of input port ―Cut‖, i.e. ―X24‖, is in accordance with the
signal type of the port.
2) Manually press down the tool presetter and check whether the polarity of port ―Cut‖ in [Port]
interface changes. If it the polarity does not change, the tool presetter must have been
damaged.

5.4.6 What should you do if software failed because of

automatic write number identification?
For NK300CX integrated CNC system, different configurations may be embedded in one software.
Hardware of different configurations is the same, which can be told from write number of board card.
Specifically, 00, GN and I5 are three matchable write number for NK300CX general software, with 00/GN
representing for 4 or less axes configurations, while I5 representing 5 or less axes configurations. T4

Maintenance「161」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

and T5 are write number for denture machine of NK300CX series, with T4 for 4 axes configuration and
T5 for 5 axes configuration separately. To conclude, matchable write number for NK300CX series
software are 00, GN, I5, T4 and T5.
Write number of the board card will be automatically identified during software startup. If write number is
mismatched, there will be installation error. You can refer to following contents for countermeasures for
different failure situations.

5.4.6.1 Write file tag not exist

Prompt: Write file tag not found, software exit!
Solution: Install legal software.
If the software is illegal, prompt as above will pop up and software installation aborts. You can solve this
problem by installing legal software.

5.4.6.2 Write type not matched

Prompt: Device type is not matchable
Solution: ①Register the software and write the board card again; ②Re-install the software.
If write number of board card is not the same with the write number in configuration file, above prompt
will pop up, as shown in Fig. 5-18. There are two ways to solve this problem, register the software and
write the board card again, or install software whose write type is matchable with write type of board
card.

Fig. 5-18 Prompt for unmatchable device type

(1) Register the software again

As shown in Fig. 5-18, press F1 to open a dialog box titled ―Registration‖, see Fig. 5-19. You need to
generate a registration coder with help of ―NcStudio Generator‖ APP first, and type it into the box in.
Press F7 to confirm and complete write to hardware. Note that software needs to be restarted to validate
the new write number.
Please refer to section 3.18.4 for detailed instructions to NcStudio generator.

「162」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Fig. 5-19 “Register” dialog box

(2) Re-install software

As shown in Fig. 5-18, press F2 to open a dialog box titled ―Install software‖, see Fig. 5-20. Select an
installation package whose write number is matchable, and press F7 to install it.

Fig. 5-20 “Install software” dialog box

(3) Show desktop

As shown in Fig. 5-18, press F8 to return to the desktop.

Maintenance「163」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

5.4.6.3 Active configuration not matched

Prompt: The board card does not support current configuration, please choose another configuration in
flowing list.
Solution: Choose another proper configuration.
If active configuration of the software is found inconsistent with the configuration written by board card,
prompt as above will pop out. In this case, all you need to do is to choose a proper configuration and
restart the software.
See Fig. 5-21 for configuration list, where you can select a matchable one and press F7 to activate it.
Press F8 to exit the software and show the desktop.

Fig. 5-21 Configuration list

5.4.6.4 Active axes number and configuration not matched

Prompt: The software is illegal, you can report by calling at 021-33587550.
Solution: Re-install a legal software.
If number of actual axes is larger than that supported by hardware writing, prompt as above will appear
and the software exits. To solve this problem, please contact with the supplier and install legal software.

「164」Maintenance
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6 Driver
6.1 Driver Parameters ................................................................................................................................ 167
6.1.1 Parameters Setting of WISE Servo Driver............................................................................................... 167
6.1.2 Parameters Setting of YASKAWA Σ–Ⅱ Servo Driver ........................................................................ 168
6.1.3 Parameter Setting of YASKAWA Σ-Ⅴ Servo Driver ................................................................................ 170
6.1.4 Parameter Setting of PANASONIC MINAS A4 Servo Driver .................................................................... 171
6.1.5 Parameter Setting of PANASONIC MINAS A5 Servo Driver .................................................................... 172
6.1.6 Parameter Setting of MITSUBISHI MR-JE Servo Driver .......................................................................... 174
6.1.7 Parameter Setting of MITSUBISHI MR-E Servo Driver ............................................................................ 175
6.1.8 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-A Servo Driver ................................................................................. 176
6.1.9 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-A2 Servo Driver ............................................................................... 177
6.1.10 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-B Servo Driver ............................................................................. 179
6.1.11 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-B2 Servo Driver ........................................................................... 181
6.1.12 Parameter Setting of SANYO PY Servo Driver .................................................................................... 182
6.1.13 Parameter Setting of SANYO R Servo Driver ...................................................................................... 185
6.1.14 Parameter Setting of SANYO Q Servo Driver ..................................................................................... 185
6.1.15 Parameter Setting of KT270 Servo Driver .......................................................................................... 186
6.1.16 Parameter Setting of FUJI FALDIC-β Servo Driver .............................................................................. 188
6.1.17 Parameter Setting of STONE GS Servo Driver .................................................................................... 189
6.1.18 Parameter Setting of TECO TSDA Servo Driver .................................................................................. 190

6.2 Wiring Diagram of Driver and Terminal Board .....................................................................................191

Driver「165」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.12 Wiring Diagram of STONE GS Servo Driver ........................................................................................ 202

6.2.13 Wiring Diagram of TECO TSDA Servo Driver ...................................................................................... 203
6.2.14 Wiring Diagram of TECO ESDA Servo Driver ...................................................................................... 204

「166」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.1 Driver Parameters

Parameters listed in this chapter can only make a machine work normally instead of ensuring the best
machining results. Relevant parameters need adjusting according to the specific machine type.

6.1.1 Parameters Setting of WISE Servo Driver

Para.
Function Value Description
No.
Monitor if the number of sent and received pulses is
correct by setting this parameter. In Weihong control
Pr528 LED initial status 6 system, the correct quantity of pulses sent by control
card is detected by pulse inspection in order to
determine whether there is electrical interference.
Command pulse
When it is set to ―0‖, parameters Pr009 and Pr010 are
Pr008 No. per motor 0
valid.
circle
1st numerator of
command pulse Need
Pr009 Range: 0~230
frequency division/ calculation
Typical value: pitch 5 mm, encoder resolution 10000,
multiplication
deceleration ratio 1:1, pulse equivalent 0.001 mm/p:
Denominator of
Pr009＝10000
command pulse
Need Pr010＝pitch 5mm/ pulse equivalent 0.001mm＝5000
Pr010 frequency
calculation Pr009/Pr010=10000/5000=2/1
division/multiplicati
on
Typical value: pulse equivalent 0.001mm/p,
Output pulse No. 2500 deceleration ratio 1:1, pitch 10mm/p, sets this
Pr011
per motor circle (default) parameter to 2500; pitch 5mm/p, sets this parameter
1250.
1st position loop 480
Pr100 Unit: 0.1/s. Set it according to the actual situation.
gain (default)
1st velocity loop 270
Pr101 Unit: 0.1Hz. Set it according to the actual situation.
gain (default)
1st velocity loop
210
Pr102 integrated time Unit: 0.1ms. Set it according to the actual situation.
(default)
constant
When the value of Pr008 is not ―0‖, it can be calculated in terms of the following formula:
Screw pitch 5mm
Command pulse No. per motor circle    5000
Pulse equivalent  Mechanical deceleration ratio 0.001mm / p
When screw pitch is 5mm and pulse equivalent 0.001, the value of Pr008 is ―5000‖.

Driver「167」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

 Attachment List: the relationship among parameters Pr008, Pr009 and Pr010.

Pr008 Pr009 Pr010 Description

Command Position
Pulse Input Encoder Resolution Command
_ _ Setting Value of Pr008
20
1~2 (no (no
As shown above, the process is undergone in terms of the
influence) influence)
setting value of Pr008, not affected by the settings of Pr009
and Pr010.
Command Position
Pulse Input Encoder Resolution Command
Setting Value of Pr010
30
0 1~2
When the values of Pr008 and Pr009 are both set to ―0‖, as
shown above, the process is undergone in terms of the
setting value of Pr010.
0
Command Position
Pulse Input Setting Value of Pr009 Command
Setting Value of Pr010
1~230 1~230
When the value of Pr008 is ―0‖, but the value of Pr009 is not
―0‖, as shown above, the process is undergone in terms of
the setting values of Pr009 and Pr010.

6.1.2 Parameters Setting of YASKAWA Σ–Ⅱ Servo Driver

Para.
Function Value Description
No.
Set [0000]:
Set password (to modification to user parameters [PnXXX] and part of
prevent arbitrary auxiliary function parameters [FnXXX] permitted;
Fn010 0000
modification to Set [0001]:
parameters) modification to user parameters [PnXXX] and part of
auxiliary function parameters [FnXXX] prohibited.
Monitor if the number of sent and received pulse is
LXXXX correct by setting this parameter. In Weihong control
Pulse counter of
Un00C (Hexadecimal system, the correct quantity of pulse sent by control
input command
system) card is detected by pulse inspection in order to
determine whether there is electrical interference.
Bit 0: Set 0, ―CCW‖ is forward rotation (viewed from
Direction
the load end of screw ball); Set 1, the rotation
selection
Pn000 0010 direction of the motor is reversed.
Control mode
Bit 1: Set 1, position control mode (calculate pulse
selection
instruction all the time).

「168」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para.
Function Value Description
No.
Bit 0: Set 5, select the instruction input mode as
Select pulse
Pn200 0005 ―pulse + direction‖, negative logic.
instruction mode
Bit 3: Set 0, input differential signal into filter.
Bit 1: Set 0, Servo ON /S-ON, input from 40th pin;
Selection Set 7, Servo ON all the time.
Pn50A 8100
function Bit 3: Set 8, positive rotation not used and signal
input (P-OT) prohibited.
Selection Bit 0: Set 8, reverse rotation not used and signal
Pn50B 6548
function input (N-OT) prohibited.
Set it when servo motor with brakes.
Selection
Pn50F 0300 Bit 2: Set 3, brake interlock signal ―/BK‖ is output
function
from CN1-29, CN1-30 to control 24V relay for brake
Set it when servo motor with brakes
Selection To avoid of CN1-29 and CN1-30 being used for
Pn50E 0211
function other function and leading to brake ineffective, ―3‖ is
not allowed to appear in the 4 digits.
Servo off, time
delay of brake Set it when motor with brakes
Pn506 Depended
when motor Default setting is ―0‖, setting unit is 10ms.
stops
Range: 16 ~214. Set it according to actual PG divider
ratio.
Need
Pn201 PG divider Typical value: pulse equivalent 0.001mm/p, without
Calculation
reduction box, pitch 10mm, set this parameter to
2500; pitch 5mm, set it to 1250.

Electronic gear Pn202 = pulse No. of each encoder circle × 4 ×

Need mechanical deceleration ratio.
Pn202 ratio
Calculation Pn203 = (screw pitch/ pulse equivalent).
(numerator)
Typical value: pitch 5mm, encoder 17-bit, coaxial
connection between motor and screw, pulse
Electronic gear equivalent 0.001mm, Pn202＝16384; Pn203＝625.
Need
Pn203 ratio Pitch 5mm, encoder 17-bit, coaxial connection
Calculation
(denominator) between motor and screw, pulse equivalent
0.0005mm, Pn202＝8192; Pn203＝625.

Driver「169」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.1.3 Parameter Setting of YASKAWA Σ-Ⅴ Servo Driver

Para.
Function Value Description
No.
Set [0000]:
modification to user parameters [PnXXX] and part of
Parameter input
auxiliary function parameters [FnXXX] permitted;
Fn010 prohibition 0000
Set [0001]:
setting
modification to user parameters [PnXXX] and part of
auxiliary function parameters [FnXXX] prohibited.
Bit 0: Set 0, positive rotation at positive rotation
Function
command
Pn000 selection basic 0010
Bit 1: Set 1, position control mode (pulse sequence
switch 0
command)
Format selection
switch of Bit 0: Set 5, select the instruction mode as ―pulse +
Pn200 0005
position control direction‖, negative logic.
command
Bit 1: Set 0, Servo ON /S-ON, input from the 40th pin;
Input signal Set 7, Servo ON all the time.
Pn50A 8100
selection 1 Bit 3: Set 8, positive rotation not used and signal
input (P-OT) prohibited.
Input signal Bit 0: Set 8, negative rotation not used and signal
Pn50B 6548
selection 2 input (N-OT) prohibited.
Set it when servo motor with brakes.
Output signal Bit 2: Set 3, brake interlock signal ―/BK‖ is output
Pn50F 0300
selection 2 from CN1-29, CN1-30 to control 24V relay used for
brake
Set it when servo motor with brakes
Output signal To avoid of CN1-29 and CN1-30 being used for other
Pn50E 0211
selection 1 function and leading to brake ineffective, 3 is not
allowed to appear in the 4 digits.
Brake
instruction- Set it when motor with brakes
Pn506 Depended
servo OFF and Default setting is ―0‖, setting unit is ms.
time delay

Electronic gear
Need Pn20E Encoder resolution  Pulse equivalent  Decelerati on ratio
Pn20E ratio 
Calculation Pn210 Screw pitch
(numerator)
Electronic gear For example, screw pitch 5mm, 20-bit encoder,
Need
Pn210 ratio coupling direct drag, pulse equivalent 0.001mm,
Calculation
(denominator)

「170」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para.
Function Value Description
No.

PN20E 2  0.001 1048576 131072 210

   
PN210 5 5000 625 1
When screw pitch is 10mm,
PN20E 1048576 65536 105
  
PN210 10000 625 1
For a rotary axis with 13-bit encoder and
deceleration ratio as 60,

PN20E 213  0.001 60 8192 512

  
PN210 360 6000 375

6.1.4 Parameter Setting of PANASONIC MINAS A4 Servo

Driver

Para.
Function Value Description
No.
Monitor if the number of sent and received pulse is
correct by setting this parameter. In Weihong control
Pr01 LED initial status 12 system, the correct quantity of pulse sent by control
card is detected by pulse inspection in order to
determine whether there is electrical interference.
0: position mode
Select control
Pr02 0 1: velocity mode
mode
2: torque mode
Selection of
Pr40 command pulse 1 1: input by differential exclusive circuit
input
Select command Set command pulse input mode: command pulse +
Pr42 3
pulse input mode command direction, negative logic
Range: 1 ~ 32767. Set it according to actual PG
Feedback pulse divider ratio.
Need
Pr44 divider Pulse equivalent 0.001mm/p, deceleration ratio 1:1,
Calculation
(numerator) pitch 10mm, sets this parameter to 2500; pitch 5mm,
set it to 1250.
1st numerator of Need Typical value: pitch 5 mm, encoder resolution
Pr48 command pulse calculation 10000, shaft coupling direct drag, pulse equivalent
frequency Range: 0.001 mm:

Driver「171」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para.
Function Value Description
No.
multiplication 1~10000 Pr48＝10000
Pr4B＝pitch 5mm / pulse equivalent 0.001mm＝
5000
Pr48/Pr4B=10000/5000=2/1
Denominator of Need
the command calculation
Pr4B
pulse frequency Range:
multiplication 1~10000

6.1.5 Parameter Setting of PANASONIC MINAS A5 Servo

Driver

Para.
Function Value Description
No.
Monitor if the number of sent and received pulse is
correct by setting this parameter. In Weihong control
LED initial
Pr5.28 6 system, the correct quantity of pulse sent by control card
status
is detected by pulse inspection in order to determine
whether there is electrical interference.
0: position mode
Select control
Pr0.01 0 1: velocity mode
mode
2: torque mode
0: Photo-coupler input (PULS1,PULS2,SIGN1,SIGN2)
Selection of
1: Exclusive input for line driver (PULSH1, PULSH2,
Pr0.05 command pulse XX
SIGNH1,SIGNH2)
input
Note: generally, ―1‖ is selected for this parameter.
Command pulse
Set command pulse input mode: command pulse +
Pr0.07 input mode 3
command direction, negative logic.
setup
Command pulse
When it is set to ―0‖, parameters Pr0.09 and Pr0.10 are
Pr0.08 No. per motor 0
valid.
circle
1st numerator of Need
command pulse calculation Typical value: pitch 5 mm, encoder resolution 10000,
Pr0.09
frequency Range: shaft coupling direct drag, pulse equivalent 0.001 mm:
multiplication 0~230 Pr0.09＝10000
Denominator of Need Pr0.10＝pitch 5mm/ pulse equivalent 0.001mm＝5000
Pr0.10 the command calculation Pr0.09/Pr0.10=10000/5000=2/1
pulse frequency Range:

「172」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para.
Function Value Description
No.
multiplication 0~230

Range: 1 ~ 262144. Set it according to actual PG divider

Output pulse ratio.
Pr0.11 No. per motor 2500 Pulse equivalent 0.001mm/p, without reduction box,
circle pitch 10mm, sets this parameter to 2500; pitch 5mm, set
it to 1250.
When the value of Pr0.08 is not ―0‖, it can be calculated in terms of the following formula:
Screw pitch 5mm
Command pulse No. per motor circle    5000
Pulse equivalent *Mechanical deceleration ratio 0.001mm / p
When screw pitch is 5mm and pulse equivalent 0.001, the value of Pr0.08 is ―5000‖.

 Attached List: the relationship among parameters Pr0.08, Pr0.09 and Pr0.10.

Pr0.08 Pr0.09 Pr0.10 Description

Command
Position
Pulse Input Encoder Resolution Command
_ _ [Setting Value of Pr0.08]
20
1~2 (no (no
influence) influence) As shown above, the process is undergone in terms of the
setting value of Pr0.08, not affected by the settings of
Pr0.09 and Pr0.10.
Command
Position
Pulse Input Encoder Resolution Command
[Setting Value of Pr0.10]
0 1~230
When the values of Pr0.08 and Pr0.09 are both set to ―0‖,
as shown above, the process is undergone in terms of the
setting value of Pr0.10.
0
Command
Position
Pulse Input [Setting Value of Pr0.09] Command
[Setting Value of Pr0.10]
1~230 1~230
When the value of Pr0.08 is ―0‖, but the value of Pr0.09 is
not ―0‖, as shown above, the process is underdone in
terms of the setting values of Pr0.09 and Pr0.10.

Driver「173」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.1.6 Parameter Setting of MITSUBISHI MR-JE Servo Driver

Para.
Code Function Value description
No.
Operation
PA01 *STY XXX0 _ _ _x: select position control mode.
mode
Output
_ _ xx: select MBR (electromagnetic brake
PD24 MBR assignation to XX05
interlock).
CN1-23 pin
Electronic CMX/CDV=command unit × servo motor
Need
PA06 CMX gear resolution × mechanical deceleration ratio / pitch
calculation
numerator of screw. E.G., pitch 5 mm, encoder resolution
10000, deceleration ratio 1:1, pulse equivalent
0.001 mm,
Electronic
Need CMX/CDV=10000×0.001/5 = 2/1;
PA07 CDV gear
calculation When pulse equivalent = 0.0005mm, CMX/CDV =
denominator
1/1.
Electronic gear ratio range: 1/50 ~ 500
_ _xx: status display selection at power-on.
This is used to select a status display shown at
power-on.
Status display 00: cumulative feedback pulses
PC36 *DMD 00XX
selection 01: servo motor speed
02: droop pulses
03: cumulative command pulses
04: command pulse frequency
Command
Set command pulse input form: pulse train+ sign,
PA13 *PLSS pulse input 0011
negative logic.
form
Range: 1~65535, set according to the parameter
setting of ―Frequency Division Pulses of PG (X4)‖.
Encoder Need
PA15 *ENR Typical value: pulse equivalent 0.001, screw pitch
output pulses calculation
10mm without a reduction box, PA15=2500;
screw pitch 5mm, PA15=1250.
Input
PD03 *DI1L assignation to XX02 _ _xx: select SON under position control mode.
CN1-15 pin

「174」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.1.7 Parameter Setting of MITSUBISHI MR-E Servo Driver

Para.
Code Function Value Description
No.
Bit 0: set 0: select position control mode.
Control mode
Bit 1, select motor series: 0: HC-KFE; 1:HC-SFE;
selection and
0 *STY X0X0 Bit 3, select regenerative apparatus, set 0: not
regenerative
use.
fittings
Bit 4, select motor power.
Bit 0: input signal filter. If external input signal
causes chattering due to noises, etc., input filter is
Function
1 MBR 001X used to suppress it. Bit 1: CN1-12 function
selection 1
selection, set ―1‖: electromagnetic brake interlock
(MBR); set ―0‖: zero speed detection signal.
Electronic CMX/CDV=command unit × servo motor
Need
3 CMX gear resolution × mechanical deceleration ratio / pitch
calculation
numerator of screw. E.G., pitch 5 mm, encoder resolution
10000, shaft coupling direct drag, pulse
equivalent 0.001 mm,
Electronic
Need CMX/CDV=10000×0.001/5 = 2/1;
4 CDV gear
calculation When pulse equivalent = 0.0005mm, CMX/CDV =
denominator
1/1.
Electronic gear ratio range: 1/50 ~ 500
3: cumulative command pulses E: load inertia
When the parameter is set [3], monitor if the
number of sent and received pulse is correct by
Status display
18 *DMD 00XX setting this parameter. In Weihong control
selection
system, the correct quantity of pulse sent by
control card is detected by pulse inspection to
determine if there is electrical interference.
Function
selection 3
Set pulse command input form: pulse train+ sign,
21 *OP3 (command 0001
negative logic
pulse format
selection)
Range: 1 ~ 65535. Set it according to actual PG
divider ratio.
Encoder Need
27 *ENR Pulse equivalent 0.001mm/p, without reduction
output pulse Calculation
box, pitch 10mm, sets this parameter to 2500;
pitch 5mm, set it to 1250.
Signal input Bit 0: Servo-ON selection. [0]: servo on by
41 *DIA 0110
SON-ON, external input; [1]: servo on all the time inside.

Driver「175」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para.
Code Function Value Description
No.
LSP-ON and Bit 1: last signal of positive rotation range (LSP):
LSN-ON [1]: auto servo on inside, without external wiring.
automatically Bit 3: last signal of negative rotation range (LSN):
selection [1]: auto servo on inside and no need of external
wiring.

6.1.8 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-A Servo Driver

Para. Format
Function Value Description
No. & Range
Monitor if the number of sent and received
pulse is correct by setting this parameter. In
Driver status Weihong control system, the correct quantity
P0-02 02
display of pulse sent by control card is detected by
pulse inspection to determine if there is
electrical interference.
External pulse X=2: pulse + direction;
P1-00 ZYX 102
input type Z=1: negative logic
Z=0: during control mode switching, DIO is
maintaining the set value. Since switching
Control mode control mode is not used, Z=0
P1-01 ZYX1X0 0000
setup Y=0: forward rotation (CCW) (in terms of load);
Y=1: the rotation direction is reversed.
X1X0=00: position control mode
Y=0: when there is no servo enabled, motor
Motor stop
dynamic brake occurs; Y=1: motor is free.
P1-32 mode YX 00
X=0: motor stops instantly, X=1: motor stops
selection
with deceleration.
Electronic N1/M= encoder pulses × 4× pulse equivalent×
Gear Ratio Need mechanical deceleration ratio/ pitch.
P1-44 1~32767
(Numerator) calculation Representative value: encoder pulses =2500,
(N1) pitch=5mm, pulse equivalent=0.001mm/p,
Electronic deceleration ratio=1, calculation as below:
Gear Ratio Need N1/M= 2500×4×0.001/5 = 2 / 1, N1=2, M=1;
P1-45 1~32767
(Denominator) calculation When the multi-electronic gear ratio is not
(M) used, P2-60~ P2-62 are not required.
X1X0=01: digital input (DI1=SON)
Digital Input th
P2-10 X2X1X0 101 corresponds to 9 pin of CN1.
Pin DI1
X2 = 1: set DI1 input as NO (normally open)

「176」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Format
Function Value Description
No. & Range
a-contact point.

Digital Input Default factory setting of DI6 and DI7 are NC

P2-15 X2X1X0 100
pin DI6 (normally closed) limit signal input pins; driver
can‘t run without being connected to pin 32
and pin 31 of CN1.
Digital Input
P2-16 X2X1X0 100 X2=1: set DI6 and DI7 inputs as NO (normally
Pin DI7
open) a-contact points; X1X0=00, limit signal
input of the driver is not used.
Function
setting for
P2-17 X2X1X0 100 External EMG stop input is not used.
digital input pin
DI8
DO4 corresponds to pin 1 & pin 26, used as
clamping-position brake signal of Z-axis;
Function
X2=1: set DO4 output as NO (normally open)
setting for
P2-21 X2X1X0 108 a-contact point; X2=0: set DO4 output as NC
digital output
(normally closed) b-contact point;
pin DO4
X1X0=08: set pin 1 and pin 26 as BK+ and
BK- respectively.
DO5 corresponds to pin 28 & pin 27, used as
Function
servo alarm signal.
setting for
P2-22 X2X1X0 007 X2=0: set DO5 output as NC b-contact point.
digital output
X1X0=07: set pin 28 and pin 27 as ALRM+
pin DO5
and ALRM- respectively.
0: Servo ON must be triggered by numerical
input signal.
Servo ON
P2-51 0 1: when servo is powered, if there is no alarm
(SON) setup
signal, servo will be automatically on. Set 1
when there is no SON signal wire.

6.1.9 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-A2 Servo Driver

Format
Para.
Function & Value Description
No.
Range
Monitor if the number of sent and received
Driver status
P0-02 02 pulse is correct by setting this parameter. In
display
Weihong control system, the correct quantity

Driver「177」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Format
Para.
Function & Value Description
No.
Range
of pulse sent by control card is detected by
pulse inspection in order to determine whether
there is electrical interference.
External pulse X=2: pulse + direction;
P1-00 ZYX 102
train input type Z=1: negative logic
Z=0: during control mode switching, DIO is
maintaining the set value. Since switching
control mode is not used, Z=0;
Set control
P1-01 ZYX1X0 0000 Y=0: forward rotation (CCW) (from the view of
mode
load);
Y=1: the rotation direction is reversed.
X1X0=00: position control mode
Electronic P1- 44

Gear Ratio Need P1- 45
P1-44 1~32767
(Numerator) calculation Encoder resolution *Pulse equivalent *Deceleration ratio
(N1) Screw pitch

When encoder resolution is 1280000, screw

Electronic pitch 5mm, pulse equivalent 0.001, in direct
Gear Ratio Need coupling,
P1-45 1~32767
(Denominator) calculation P1- 44 1280000  0.001 256
 
(M) P1- 45 5 1
When the multi-electronic gear ratio is not
used, P2-60 ~P2-62 are not required.
Set output pulse number for the detector
according to actual PG divider ratio.
Detector
20 ~ Need Pulse equivalent 0.001mm/p, without
P1-46 output pulse
320000 calculation reduction box, pitch 10mm, sets this
No. setting
parameter to 10000; pitch 5mm, sets it to
5000.
X1X0=01: digital input (DI1 = SON)
Digital Input corresponds to 9th pin of CN1.
P2-10 X2X1X0 101
Pin 1 (DI1) X2=1: set DI1 input as NO (normally open)
a-contact point.

「178」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Format
Para.
Function & Value Description
No.
Range
Function
Default factory setting of DI6 and DI7 is NC
setting for
P2-15 X2X1X0 100 (normally closed) limit signal input; driver can‘t
digital input pin
run without being connected to pin 32 and pin
DI6
31 of CN1.
Function
X2=1: set DI6 and DI7 inputs as NO a-contact
setting for
P2-16 X2X1X0 100 points.
digital input pin
X1X0=00, limit input of driver is not used.
DI7
Function
setting for
P2-17 X2X1X0 100 External EMG stop input is not used.
digital input pin
DI8
DO4 corresponds to pin 1 & pin 26, used as
clamping-position brake signal of Z-axis;
Function
X2=1: set DO4 output as NO (normally open)
setting for
P2-21 X2X1X0 108 a-contact point; X2=0: set DO4 output as NC
digital output
(normally closed) b-contact point;
pin DO4
X1X0=08: set pin 1 and pin 26 as BK+ and
BK- respectively.
DO5 corresponds to pin 28 & pin 27, used as
Function
servo alarm signal.
setting for
P2-22 X2X1X0 007 X2=0: set DO5 output as NC b-contact point.
digital output
X1X0=07: set pin 28 and pin 27 as ALRM+
pin DO5
and ALRM- respectively.

6.1.10 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-B Servo Driver

Para. Format &

Driver「179」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Format &

Function Value Description
No. Range
Y=0: forward rotation (CCW) (from the
view of load);
P1-01 Set control mode YX1X0 000
Y=1: the rotation direction is reversed.
X1X0=00: position control mode
Y=0: when there is no servo enabled,
motor dynamic brake occurs; Y=1: motor
P1-32 Motor stop mode YX 00 is free.
X=0: motor stops instantly,
X=1: motor stops with deceleration.
Electronic Gear N1/M= mechanical deceleration ratio × 4 ×
Need
P1-44 Ratio 1~32767 encoder pulses × pulse equivalent / pitch.
calculation
( Numerator)(N1) Representative value: encoder
pulses=2500, pitch =5mm, pulse
equivalent=0.001 mm/p, deceleration ratio
Electronic Gear = 1, calculation as below:
Need
P1-45 Ratio 1~32767 N1 / M = 2500×4×0.001/5 = 2/1, N1=2,
calculation
(Denominator)(M) M=1;
When the multi-electronic gear ratio is not
used, P2-60 ~P2-62 are not required.
X1X0=01: digital input (DI1 = SON)
Function setting
corresponds to 17th pin of CN1.
P2-10 for digital input pin X2X1X0 101
X2=1: set DI1 input as NO (normally open)
DI1
a-contact point.
Default factory setting of DI6 is NC
(normally closed) limit signal input; driver
Function setting can‘t run without being connected to pin
P2-15 for digital input pin X2X1X0 100 32 and pin 31 of CN1.
DI6 X2=1: set DI6 input as NO a-contact point.
X1X0=00, limit input of the driver is not
used.
DO1 corresponds to 16th pin, as
clamping-position brake signal of Z-axis;
Function setting X2=1: set DO1 output as NO a-contact
P2-18 for digital output X2X1X0 108 point;
pin DO1 X2=0: set DO1 output as NC b-contact
point;
X1X0=08: set 16th pin as BK+.
DO3 corresponds to pin 1, used as servo
Function setting
alarm signal.
P2-20 for digital output X2X1X0 007
X2=0: set DO3 as NC b-contact point.
pin DO3
X1X0=07: set pin 1 as ALRM+.

「180」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.1.11 Parameter Setting of DELTA ASDA-B2 Servo Driver

Para. Format &

Function Value Description
No. Range
Monitor if the number of sent and received
pulse is correct by setting this parameter.
In Weihong control system, the correct
Driver status
P0-02 02 quantity of pulse sent by control card is
display
detected by pulse inspection in order to
determine whether there is electrical
interference.
External pulse X=2: pulse + direction;
P1-00 ZYX 102
train input type Z=1: negative logic
Z=0: during control mode switching, DIO is
maintaining the set value. Since switching
control mode is not used, Z=0;
P1-01 Set control mode ZYX1X0 0000 Y=0: forward rotation (CCW) (from the
view of load);
Y=1: the rotation direction is reversed.
X1X0=00: position control mode
Electronic Gear N1/M= mechanical deceleration ratio × 4 ×
Ratio Need encoder pulses × pulse equivalent/ pitch
P1-44 1~32767
( Numerator) calculation Representative value:
(N1) encoder pulses =40000, pitch =5mm,
pulse equivalent=0.001, deceleration ratio
Electronic Gear = 1, calculation as below:
Ratio Need N1 / M = 40000×4×0.001/5 = 32/1, N1=32,
P1-45 1~32767
(Denominator) calculation M=1;
(M) When the multi-electronic gear ratio is not
used, P2-60 ~P2-62 are not required.
X1X0=01: digital input (DI1 = SON)
Function setting
corresponds to 9th pin of CN1.
P2-10 for digital input pin X2X1X0 101
X2=1: set DI1 input as NO (normally open)
DI1
a-contact point.
Default factory setting of DI6 and DI7 is
NC (normally closed) limit signal input;
Function setting driver can‘t run without being connected to
P2-15 for digital input pin X2X1X0 100 pin 32 and pin 31 of CN1.
DI6 X2=1: set DI6 and DI7 inputs as NO
a-contact points.
X1X0=00, limit input of the driver is not

Driver「181」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Format &

Function Value Description
No. Range
used.

Function setting
P2-16 for digital input pin X2X1X0 100
DI7

Function setting
P2-17 for digital input pin X2X1X0 100 External EMG stop input is not used.
DI8

DO1 corresponds to pin 6 & pin 7, used as

clamping-position brake signal of Z-axis;
X2=1: set DO1 output as NO (normally
Function setting
open) a-contact point; X2=0: set DO1
P2-18 for digital output X2X1X0 108
output as NC (normally closed) b-contact
pin DO1
point;
X1X0=08: set pin 6 and pin 7 as BK- and
BK+ respectively.
DO5 corresponds to pin 28 & pin 27, used
as servo alarm signal.
Function setting
X2=0: set DO5 output as NC b-contact
P2-22 for digital output X2X1X0 007
point.
pin DO5
X1X0=07: set pin 28 and pin 27 as ALRM+
and ALRM- respectively.

6.1.12 Parameter Setting of SANYO PY Servo Driver

Para. Standard Setting

Abbr. Name Unit Remark
No. Value Range
Depends on the specific
encoder resolution. The
formula of electronic gear ratio
1/32767 of servo driver is as below:
Electronic
1-2 EGER 4/1 to Electronic gear ratio numerator
gear ratio
32767/1 =mechanical deceleration ratio
× 4× pulse No. per encoder
circle;
Electronic gear ratio

「182」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Standard Setting

Abbr. Name Unit Remark
No. Value Range
denominator = (screw pitch /
pulse equivalent)
E.G. In Weihong system, the
default pulse equivalent is
0.001mm/p, screw pitch is
5mm, pulse number per
encoder circle is 2000 shaft
coupling direct drag, currently
the numerator of the electronic
gear ratio is 8, and the
denominator is 5. (Select an
incremental type encoder)
Pulse amount of the motor
encoder
1. Set the pulse amount of
the motor encoder;
2. Standard configuration 500
1-16 MENP of the encoder pulse No. to P/R
is as below. 65535
Incremental encoder
omitting wiring: --2000P/R
Absolute
encoder:--2048P/R
Pulse format of position command:
2-0 PMOD Our system uses: direction + pulse format, the parameters are shown as
following:

Driver「183」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Standard Setting

Abbr. Name Unit Remark
No. Value Range
PMOD 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
When bit 7=0
Bit Bit Command Pulse Input Digital Filter
1 0 Min. Pulse Width
0 0 0.8µs
0 1 0.2µs
1 0 0.4µs
1 1 1.6µs

When bit 7=1

Bit Bit Command Pulse Input Digital Filter
1 0 Min. Pulse Width
0 0 3.2µs
0 1 0.8µs
1 0 1.6µs
1 1 6.4µs

Bit6 Bit5 Command Pulse Format

1 0 Direction + Pulse

Switch of Digital Filter

0 High Speed
1 Low Speed (1/4)

Control mode:
*Select one control mode from position, velocity, and
torque modes.

Selection Item Content

Position Position control mode
Velocity Velocity control mode
Torque Torque control mode Our system
Velo Torq Velocity Torque switch mode selects
4-3 TYPE 6 types
Posi Torq Position Torque switch mode position
Posi Velo Position Velocity switch mode control mode.

Referring to the switch type, the requisite control

mode can be selected from pin 36 or 35 of the CN1.
Func3, set Bit7 as 0: pin 36 is enabled.
set Bit7 as 1:pin 35 is enabled.
＄＄＄: standard value varies with the reset setup
(leave factory setting).

「184」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.1.13 Parameter Setting of SANYO R Servo Driver

Para. Set
Parameter Name Remarks
No. Value

Group 0, parameter setting of tuning mode

Setting of the tuning
00 00 Set as auto tuning mode
mode
Group 8, setting of the control parameters
Polarity of position
00 00 Position command mode: positive rotation effective
input
Input command
11 02 Pulse + negative logic
mode
It depends on the resolution of the specific encoder.
E.G.: incremental encoder 2000, motor needs 2000
×4=8000 pulses per circle. And pulse equivalent of
Setting of electronic
15 8/5 Weihong control card is 0.001mm/p, it needs 1000
gear
pulses to move 1mm along line, in other words, if the
screw pitch is 5, so, to move 5mm along line needs
5000 pulses, so F=8000/5000=8/5.
Group 9, setting of function effective

05 Servo ON selection 02 Select servo ON state.

Servo alarm
02 10 Make the function of servo alarm effective
elimination
Setting of the system parameters
Standard incremental encoder. The parameter
02 Encoder selection 00 depends on the specific situation, what we list is only
the representative one.
03 Encoder resolution 2000 500－65535, set the encoder resolution manually.
Control mode
08 02 Select position control mode
selection

6.1.14 Parameter Setting of SANYO Q Servo Driver

Para. Parameter
Set Value Remarks
No. Name

Group 1

GER1 Electronic gear 1/1 Set electronic gear ratio for position command pulse.

Driver「185」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Parameter
Set Value Remarks
No. Name
ratio 1 E.G., incremental encoder 2000, motor needs 2000
×4=8000 pulses per circle. And pulse equivalent of
Weihong control card is 0.001mm/p, it needs 1000
pulses to move 1mm along line, in other words, if the
screw pitch is 5, so, to move 5mm along line needs 5000
pulses, so F=8000/5000=8/5.
Electronic gear This setting is the same as that of electronic gear ratio 1
GER2 1/1
ratio 2 and activated during electronic gear switching.
Group 4
Command
PA400 00H Set position command pulse as ―pulse + direction‖.
pulse selection
Group 8

S-ON Servo ON 02H Select servo ON state.

AL-RST Alarm reset 10H Make the function of servo alarm effective

Setting of the system parameters

Standard incremental encoder. The parameter depends
Encoder
01 00 on the specific situation, what we list is only the
selection
representative one.
Incremental
03 encoder 2000 500－65535, set the encoder resolution manually.
resolution
Control mode
08 02 Select position control mode.
selection

6.1.15 Parameter Setting of KT270 Servo Driver

Para.
Parameter Name Value Description
No.
The control mode of the driver can be set through this
Control mode parameter:
PA4 0
selection 0: position control mode; 1: speed control mode;
2: trial run control mode; 3: JOG control mode.

「186」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para.
Parameter Name Value Description
No.
Set the ratio of the position command pulse (electronic
gear).
Under position control mode, with the setting of the PA12
and PA13, it is convenient to match with pulse source of
each type, which can reach the user‘s perfect control
resolution (that is angle/pulse)
Expression: P  G  N  C  4
P: pulse amount of the input command;
G: electronic gear ratio, G=ratio numerator / ratio
Numerator of denominator.
PA12 position command 2 N: circle number that the motor rotates;
pulse ratio C: each circle line number of photo electricity encoder,
C of our system =2500.
E.G.: input 6000 command pulses to make the servo motor
rotate one circle,
N  C  4 1  2500  4 5
G  
P 6000 3
So set PA12 as 5 and PA13 as 3.
We recommend the range of electronic gear ratio as:
1
 G  50
50
Denominator of
PA13 position command 1 Refer to parameter PA12.
pulse ratio
Set the input mode of the position command pulse; there
are following three modes can be selected by setting the
Input mode of the parameter:
PA14 position command 0 0: pulse + symbol;
pulse 1: positive rotation pulse/negative rotation pulse;
2: two orthogonal pulses inputs
Default setting is 0: pulse + symbol, negative logic.
0: Valid stroke end of LSP, LSN positive rotation, negative
rotation.

When switch LSP is connected, driving of the positive

Invalid input on
rotation is allowed; When switch LSP is disconnected,
PA20 the end of the 1
driving of the positive rotation is prohibited (torque of the
stroke
positive direction is 0). LSN is the same as LSP. If LSP and
LSN are all disconnected, the abnormal alarming of driving
prohibited (NO.7) will occur.

Driver「187」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para.
Parameter Name Value Description
No.
1: Invalid stroke end of LSP, LSN positive rotation, negative
rotation.
No matter which state of the switch LSP and LSN is in,
driving of positive rotation and negative rotation are all
allowed. Simultaneously, even if LSP and LSN are all
disconnected, abnormal alarming of driving prohibited
(NO.7) will not occur.

2: Invalid stroke end of LSP, LSN positive rotation, negative

rotation, and SON is forced to be effective. (Note: SON
forcedly effective is only used for motor debugging. In
normal use, we suggest controlling the state of SON by
input port.)

3: Valid stroke end of LSP, LSN positive rotation, negative

rotation.
When switch LSP is connected, driving of the positive
rotation is allowed; When switch LSP is disconnected,
driving of the positive rotation is prohibited (the speed of
positive direction is 0, but the torque is not 0). LSN is the
same as LSP. When LSP and LSN are all disconnected,
abnormal alarming of driving prohibited (NO.7) will not
occur.

6.1.16 Parameter Setting of FUJI FALDIC-β Servo Driver

Para.
Name Value Description
No.
Need Command pulse numerator and denominator are
Command pulse
01 calculation also equal to those of the electronic gear ratio.
numerator α
1~32767 α/ β=encoder resolution× pulse equivalent×
mechanical deceleration ratio / screw pitch.
Typical value: encoder resolution 65536, pitch
Need
Command pulse 5mm, pulse equivalent 0.001, mechanical
02 calculation
denominator β deceleration ratio 1,
1~32767
α / β=65536×0.001 / 5=8192 / 625,
So α=8192, β=625.
Pulse string input Set the input mode of pulse string as: instruction +
03 0
form symbol, that is ‗pulse + direction‘.

「188」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Direction of rotation Set 0: Positive direction: Forward rotation (CCW);

04 0 or 1
switch Set 1: Positive direction: Reverse rotation (CW).
CONT1 is distributed as RUN (i.e. SON); if not
CONT1 signal
10 1 distributed, CONT1 will be auto ON if there is no
distribution
alarming when powered.
CONT2 is distributed as RST (i.e. servo alarming
clearance CLR).
CONT2 signal
11 2 When 12, 13, 14 are 0, that is CONT3, CONT4 and
distribution
CONT5 can‘t be distributed as OT over-travel or
EMG (external emergency stop).
Set 1, OUT1 is distributed as a-contact point of
OUT1 signal alarming output;
15 1
distribution Set 2, OUT1 is distributed as b-contact point of
alarming detection.
Parameter Set 0, write-enable.
27 0 or 1
write-protection Set 1, write-protected.
Its initial value is 0, and it is set ―1‖ here to enable
74 CONT Always ON 1 1
servo (RUN).

6.1.17 Parameter Setting of STONE GS Servo Driver

Para. Valu
Para. Name Description
No. e
Electronic gear
F0f 2 Electronic gear ratio of position mode: 4× pulse frequency fed
ratio numerator
back by servo encoder = command pulse frequency× F0f / F10;
Electronic gear
value of F0f / F10 must be within 1/100~100. (calculation with
F10 ratio 1
pitch 10mm)
denominator
0: External speed running mode; make sure the value and
direction of motor speed according to the external analog -10V
~ +10V signal of CN2-16, 17;
1: Internal speed running mode; make sure the value and
direction of motor speed according to the setting of parameter
F33, F35, F37, F39 and the port status of CN2-9, CN2-25;
Control mode 2: Position pulse running mode; accept the input of external
F00 2
selection position pulse and direction level signal;
3: Jog mode; make sure the motor speed in terms of parameter
setting of F3b, and control the rotation direction by the direction
keystroke ▼ and ▲;
4: Torque mode; make sure the value and direction of motor
torque according to the external analog -10V ~ +10V signal of
CN2-43, 1;

Driver「189」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Valu
Para. Name Description
No. e
5~10: Mixed mode; select mode according to the port input
status of CN2-24:
CN2-24 Interface Status
F00
Value
OFF (Mode One) ON (Mode Two)

5 Position Pulse Mode External Speed Running Mode

6 Position Pulse Mode Internal Speed Running Mode

7 Position Pulse Mode Torque Mode

8 Internal Speed Running Mode External Speed Running Mode

9 Internal Speed Running Mode Torque Mode

10 External Speed Running Mode Torque Mode

Command pulse string mode selection of position mode:

1 – Single pulse train Pulse 12 27

positive logic Direction 13 28

Pulse 12 27
2 – Single pulse train
negative logic Direction 13 28

3 – Double pulse CCW 12 27

Pulse input train positive logic CW 13 28

F2e 2
mode selection 4 – Double pulse CCW 12 27
train negative logic CW 13 28

5 – Orthogonal Phase A 12 27

pulse positive logic Phase B 13 28

6 – Orthogonal pulse Phase A 12 27

negative logic Phase B 13 28

6.1.18 Parameter Setting of TECO TSDA Servo Driver

Para. No. Function Value Description

Control mode
Value CN1 Pin12 open CN1 Pin12 closed
circuit circuit
Pn010-1 Set control mode 1 0 Speed control Speed control
1 Position control Position control
2 Torque control Torque control
3 Speed control Speed control

「190」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. No. Function Value Description

4 Position control Position control
5 Torque control Torque control
Value The format of pulse input
Set the pulse input
0 Pulse + direction
Pn010-2 format under position 0
1 Dipulse
control mode
2 A/B phase difference
Value Function
Motor rotates anti-clockwise with the input
Set rotation direction 0
Pn010-3 1 of positive command.
of motor
Motor rotates clockwise with the input of
1
positive command.
Electronic gear ratio
Pn021 5 The input pulse amount will be multiplied by the ratio
numerator
before output. Ratio range of parameter 21 to 22:
Electronic gear ratio
Pn022 1 1/127＜parameter 21/ parameter 22＜127
denominator
Value Function
Set the value of
Pn011-4 1 0 Output of ―0‖ speed signal
Pin20 of CN1
1 Output of brake signal
Set the maximum
It can correct the phenomenon of unauthorized
pulse frequency
over-travel. Received frequency is divided into 8
Pn013-1 received by the 7
segments from 500Kpps to 200Kpps. ―0‖ indicates
driver under position
500Kpps while ―7‖ 200Kpps.
control mode

CAUTION
For the parameter setting of a specific driver, refer to the driver manual of the specific brand.

6.2 Wiring Diagram of Driver and Terminal

Board
Wiring diagrams in this part are the wiring diagrams of CNC system-axes control-driver motion. When it
is required to use one axis of the CNC system to control the motion of two drivers, the wiring diagram is
as shown in Figure 2 in section 6.2.2 and Figure 4 in section 6.2.6 (taking YASKAWA driver and DELTA
driver as an example; for YASKAWA server, its alarm signal wiring is NC type, while for DELTA server, its
alarm signal wiring is NO type).

Driver「191」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.1 Wiring Diagram of WISE Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface WISE Servo CN20 50P HD Plug

+24V 6 47 +24VIN
ALM 8 31 ALM+
SON 9 40 SRV-ON
CLR 10 44 A-CLR
GND 15 1 GND
32 ALM-

PUL+ 11 7 PULS
PUL- 12 8 /PULS
DIR+ 13 11 SIGN
DIR- 14 12 /SIGN

A+ 1 33 PAO
A- 2 34 /PAO
B+ 3 35 PBO
B- 4 36 /PBO
C+ 5 19 PCO
C- 7 20 /PCO

Figure 1 without brake lines

Note: twisted pair for differential signals

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface WISE Servo CN2 50P HD Plug

+24V 6 47 +24VIN
ALM 8 31 ALM+
SON 9 40 SRV-ON
CLR 10 44 A-CLR
GND 15 1 GND
32 ALM-

PUL+ 11 7 PULS
PUL- 12 8 /PULS
DIR+ 13 11 SIGN
DIR- 14 12 /SIGN

A+ 1 33 PAO
A- 2 34 /PAO
B+ 3 35 PBO
B- 4 36 /PBO
C+ 5 19 PCO
C- 7 20 /PCO
BK+（Red ）
29 BRK-OFF+
Z-axis Brake Line
30 BRK-OFF-
BK-（Black）

Figure 2 with brake lines

Note: twisted pair for differential signals.

「192」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.2 Wiring Diagram of YASKAWA AC Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface SGDM Servo CN1 50P HD Pins

Signal Pin Pin Signal

A+ 1 33 PA0
A- 2 34 /PA0
B+ 3 35 PB0
B- 4 36 /PB0
C+ 5 19 PC0
C- 7 20 /PC0

PUL+ 11 7 PULS
PUL- 12 8 /PULS
DIR+ 13 11 SIGN
DIR- 14 12 /SIGN

+24V 6 47 +24V
ALM 8 31 ALM+
SON 9 40 /S-ON
CLR 10 44 /ALM-RST
GND 15 32 ALM-
1 SG
Red
29 S-RDY+/BK+
Z axis brake line
30 S-RDY-/BK-
Black

Figure 1

SGDM Servo CN1 50P HD Plug Weihong DB15 Driver Interface SGDM Servo CN1 50P HD Plug

Signal Pin Signal Pin Pin Signal

PA0 33 A+ 1 33 PA0
/PA0 34 A- 2 34 /PA0
PB0 35 B+ 3 35 PB0
/PB0 36 B- 4 36 /PB0
PC0 19 C+ 5 19 PC0
/PC0 20 C- 7 20 /PC0

PULS 7 PUL+ 11 7 PULS

/PULS 8 PUL- 12 8 /PULS
SIGN 11 DIR+ 13 11 SIGN
/SIGN 12 DIR- 14 12 /SIGN

+24V 47 +24V 6 47 +24V

ALM+ 31 ALM 8 31 ALM+
/S-ON 40 SON 9 40 /S-ON
/ALM-RST 44 CLR 10 44 /ALM-RST
ALM- 32 GND 15 32 ALM-
SG 1 1 SG

Red Red
S-RDY+/BK+ 29 29 S-RDY+/BK+
Z-axis Brake Line Z-axis Brake Line
S-RDY-/BK- 30 30 S-RDY-/BK-
Black Black

Figure 2

Driver「193」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.3 Wiring Diagram of PANASONIC AC Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver interface Panasonic MINAS-A5 Servo 50P HD Plug
Signal Pin Pin Signal
A+ 1 21 0A+
A- 2 22 0A-
B+ 3 48 0B+
B- 4 49 0B-
C+ 5 23 0Z+
C- 7 24 0Z-

PUL+ 11 44 PULS1
PUL- 12 45 PULS2
DIR+ 13 46 SIGN1
DIR- 14 47 SIGN2

+24V 6 7 COM+
ALM 8 37 ALM+
SON 9 29 SRV-ON
CLR 10 31 A-CLR
GND 15 41 COM-
36 ALM-
Red 11 BRKOFF+
Z-axis Brake Line 10 BRKOFF-
Black
50 FG

「194」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.4 Wiring Diagram of MITSUBISHI MR-JE Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver interface Mitsubishi MR-JE CN1 50P HD Plug
Signal Pin Pin Signal
A+ 1 4 LA
A- 2 5 LAR
B+ 3 6 LB
B- 4 7 LBR
C+ 5 8 LZ
C- 7 9 LZR

PUL+ 11 10 PP
PUL- 12 11 PG
DIR+ 13 35 NP
DIR- 14 36 NG

+24V 6 20 DICOM
ALM 8 48 ALM
SON 9 15 SON
CLR 10 19 RES
GND 15 46 DOCOM
42 EMG
43 LSP
44 LSN
47 DOCOM

Figure 1 without brake lines

Note: twisted pair for differential signals.

Weihong DB15 Driver interface Mitsubishi MR-JE CN1 50P HD Plug

Signal Pin Pin Signal
A+ 1 4 LA
A- 2 5 LAR
B+ 3 6 LB
B- 4 7 LBR
C+ 5 8 LZ
C- 7 9 LZR

PUL+ 11 10 PP
PUL- 12 11 PG
DIR+ 13 35 NP
DIR- 14 36 NG

+24V 6 20 DICOM
ALM 8 48 ALM
SON 9 15 SON
CLR 10 19 RES
GND 15 46 DOCOM
42 EMG
43 LSP
44 LSN
47 DOCOM
BRK+ 23 MBR
BRK- 46 DOCOM

Figure 2 with brake lines

Note: twisted pair for differential signals.

Driver「195」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.5 Wiring Diagram of MITSUBISHI MR-E Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface MITSUBISHI MR-E-A 26P HD Plug

Pin Signal
Signal Pin 2 OPC
+24V 6 1 VIN
ALM 8 9 ALM
SON 9 4 SON
CLR 10 3 RES
GND 15 13 SG
8 EMG

A+ 1 15 LA
A- 2 16 LAR
B+ 3 17 LB
B- 4 18 LBR
C+ 5 19 LZ
C- 7 20 LZR

PUL+ 11 23 PP
PUL- 12 22 PG
DIR+ 13 25 NP
DIR- 14 24 NG
Red 12 MBR
Z-axis Brake Line
13 SG
Black

6.2.6 Wiring Diagram of DELTA Servo Driver

DELTA ASDA-A, ASDA-A2 and ASDA-AB use the same cable. Among them, the wiring pins of ASDA-A2
and ASDA-AB are totally the same. As for ASDA-A, with PULSE as 41 and /PULSE as 43, its pulse
signal pins are opposite to those of ASDA-A2 and ASDA-AB, but the other wiring pins are totally the
same. For the detailed parameters settings, see section 6.1.9 and section 6.1.11.

「196」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface DELTA ASDA-A Servo 50P

Signal Pin Pin Signal
A+ 1 21 OA
A- 2 22 /OA
B+ 3 25 OB
B- 4 23 /OB
C+ 5 50 OZ
C- 7 24 /OZ

PUL+ 11 43 PULSE
PUL- 12 41 /PULSE
DIR+ 13 36 SIGN
DIR- 14 37 /SIGN
+24V 6 11 COM+
ALM 8 28 DO5+ ALRM
SON 9 9 DI1 SON
CLR 10 33 DI5 ARST
GND 15 45 COM-
30 DI8 EMGS
27 DO5-
47 COM-
Red
1 DO4+
Z-axis Brake Line
26 DO4-
Black

Figure 1

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface DELTA ASDA-B DB25 (Two-line Pinholes)

Signal Pin Pin Signal
+24V 6 4 COM+
ALM 8 17 DI1 SON
SON 9 1 DO3+ ALM
CLR 10 18 DI2 ARST
GND 15 13 COM-

PUL+ 11 22 PULSE
PUL- 12 21 /PULSE
DIR+ 13 20 SIGN
DIR- 14 19 /SIGN

A+ 1 10 OA
A- 2 23 /OA
B+ 3 12 OB
B- 4 11 /OB
C+ 5 24 OZ
C- 7 25 /OZ
Red
16 DO1+
Z-axis Brake Line
13 COM-
Black

Figure 2

Driver「197」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface DELTA ASDA-B2 DB25(Two-line Pinholes)

Signal Pin Pin Signal

+24V 6 11 COM+
ALM 8 9 DI1 SON
SON 9 28 DO5+ ALRM+
CLR 10 33 DI5 ARST
GND 15 14 COM-

27 DO5- ALRM-
PUL+ 11 41 PULSE
PUL- 12 43 /PULSE
DIR+ 13 37 SIGN
DIR- 14 39 /SIGN

A+ 1 21 OA
A- 2 22 /OA
B+ 3 25 OB
B- 4 23 /OB
C+ 5 13 OZ
C- 7 24 /OZ
Bk+ (Brown)
7 DO1+
Z-axis Brake Line
6 COM-
BK- (Black)

Note: twisted pair cable used for

differential signals
Figure 3

DELTA ASDA-B DB25 Weihong DB15 Driver DELTA ASDA-B DB25

(Two-line Pinholes) Interface (Two-line Pinholes)
Signal Pin Signal Pin Pin Signal
COM+ 4 +24V 6 4 COM+
DI1 SON 17 ALM 8 17 DI1 SON
DO3+ ALM 1 SON 9 1 DO3+ ALM
DI2 ARST 18 CLR 10 18 DI2 ARST
COM- 13 GND 15 13 COM-

PULSE 22 PUL+ 11 22 PULSE

/PULSE 21 PUL- 12 21 /PULSE
SIGN 20 DIR+ 13 20 SIGN
/SIGN 19 DIR- 14 19 /SIGN

OA 10 A+ 1 10 OA
/OA 23 A- 2 23 /OA
OB 12 B+ 3 12 OB
/OB 11 B- 4 11 /OB
OZ 24 C+ 5 24 OZ
/OZ 25 C- 7 25 /OZ
Red Red
DO1+ 16 16 DO1+
Z-axis Brake Line Z-axis Brake Line
COM- 13 13 COM-
Black Black

Figure 4

「198」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.7 Wiring Diagram of FUJI Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface FUJI FALDIC-β 26P HD Plug

Signal Pin Pin Signal

+24V 6 1 P24
ALM 8 15 OUT1
SON 9 2 CONT1 RUN
CLR 10 3 CONT2 RST
GND 15 14 M24
A+ 1 9 FFA
A- 2 10 *FFA
B+ 3 11 FFB
B- 4 12 *FFB
C+ 5 23 FFZ
C- 7 24 *FFZ

PUL+ 11 7 CA
PUL- 12 8 *CA
DIR+ 13 20 CB
DIR- 14 21 *CB

Note: twisted pair for differential signals.

Brake unavailable.

6.2.8 Wiring Diagram of HITACHI Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface HITACHI ADA Servo Driver

Signal Pin Pin Signal

+24V 6 2 PLC
ALM 8 11 ALM
SON 9 26 SON
CLR 10 27 RS
GND 15 30 CM1
34 CM2
33 PEN

PUL+ 11 15 PLSP
PUL- 12 16 PLSN
DIR+ 13 40 SIGP
DIR- 14 41 SIGN

A+ 1 21 OAP
A- 2 22 OAN
B+ 3 46 OBP
B- 4 47 OBN
C+ 5 23 OZP
C- 7 24 OZN

13 BRK
Z-axis Brake Line

Driver「199」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.9 Wiring Diagram of SANYO PY Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface SANYO PY DB50 HD Plug
Signal Pin Pin Signal
A+ 1 3 OA
A- 2 4 /OA
B+ 3 5 OB
B- 4 6 /OB
C+ 5 7 OC
C- 7 8 /OC

PUL+ 11 28 NPC
PUL- 12 29 /NPC
DIR+ 13 26 PPC
DIR- 14 27 /PPC

+24V 6 23 COM+
49 COM+
ALM 8 43 ALM
SON 9 37 SON
CLR 10 30 RST
GND 15 24 COM
48 SG
47 SG
25 COM
12 SG
42 HBON
Z-axis Brake Line

「200」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.10 Wiring Diagram of SANYO R Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface SANYO R DB50 HD Plug
Signal Pin Pin Signal
A+ 1 3 OA
A- 2 4 /OA
B+ 3 5 OB
B- 4 6 /OB
C+ 5 7 OC
C- 7 8 /OC

PUL+ 11 28 PPC
PUL- 12 29 /PPC
DIR+ 13 26 NPC
DIR- 14 27 /NPC

+24V 6 50 COM+
49 COM+
ALM 8 46 OUT
SON 9 37 SON
CLR 10 15 RST
GND 15 24 COM
48 SG
47 SG
25 SG

42 HBON
Z-axis Brake Line

6.2.11 Wiring Diagram of KT270 Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface KT 270 Series Servo

Signal Pin Pin Signal

+24V 6 1 COM0
ALM 8 12 ALM
SON 9 2 SON CN4
CLR 10 3 RES
GND 15 6 COM1

PUL+ 11 3 PP
PUL- 12 8 PG
DIR+ 13 4 NP CN3
DIR- 14 9 NG

A+ 1 3 LA
A- 2 8 LAR
B+ 3 4 LB CN6
B- 4 9 LBR
C+ 5 2 LZ
C- 7 7 LZR

Driver「201」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.12 Wiring Diagram of STONE GS Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface STONE GS Series Servo (3-line DB44 Pins )
Signal Pin Pin Signal
+24V 6 7 Input signal anode common port
ALM 8 22 Fault signal output+
SON 9 23 Servo enable input
CLR 10 8 Alarm clear signal input
GND 15 6 Fault signal output-

PUL+ 11 12 Pulse command signal input+

PUL- 12 27 Pulse command signal input-
DIR+ 13 13 Direction/pulse command input +
DIR- 14 28 Direction/pulse command input-

A+ 1 33 Signal differential output +

A- 2 34 Signal differential output -
B+ 3 35 Signal differential output +
B- 4 36 Signal differential output -
C+ 5 31 Signal differential output +
C- 7 32 Signal differential output -
Red 21 BRAKE+
Z-axis Brake Line
5 BRAKE-
Black

「202」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.13 Wiring Diagram of TECO TSDA Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface TECO TSDA Series Servo (50P)

Signal Pin Pin Signal

+24V 6 45 IN-COM
ALM 8 19 ALM
SON 9 1 /SON
CLR 10 2 /AL-RS
GND 15 46 DG
47 DG
48 DG
49 DG
4 FSTP
5 RSTP

PUL+ 11 14 PP
PUL- 12 15 PN
DIR+ 13 16 DP
DIR- 14 17 DN

A+ 1 35 PA
A- 2 36 /PA
B+ 3 37 PB
B- 4 38 /PB
C+ 5 39 PZ
C- 7 40 /PZ
BK+ 20 BI
BK- 47 DG
50 FG

With a towline

Driver「203」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

6.2.14 Wiring Diagram of TECO ESDA Servo Driver

Weihong DB15 Driver Interface TECO ESDA Series Servo

Signal Pin Pin Signal

+24V 6 10 +24V
ALM 8 14 ALM
SON 9 1 SON
CLR 10 2 CLR
GND 15 22 N24

PUL+ 11 4 PP
PUL- 12 5 PN
DIR+ 13 6 DP
DIR- 14 7 DN

A+ 1 16 PA
A- 2 17 /PA
B+ 3 18 PB
B- 4 19 /PB
C+ 5 20 PZ
C- 7 21 /PZ

25 FG

Without brake treatment

「204」Driver
Specialized Concentrated Focused

7 Table of Parameters
Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
1.0 Axis
1: Positive
N10000 Axis Direction (X/Y/Z) -1 Restart 3.3.1
-1: Negative
-0.0000009~999
N10010 Pulse Equivalent (X/Y/Z) 0.001 Restart 3.3.2
(mm/p)
X: 0
TravelLimits-Negative(X/Y/ -99999~99999
N10020 Y: 0 Restart 3.3.3
Z) (mm)
Z: -100
X: 800
TravelLimits-Positive -99999~99999
N10030 Y: 600 Restart 3.3.3
(X/Y/Z) (mm)
Z: 0
Enable Travel Limits YES: Valid;
N10040 YES Restart 3.3.3
(X/Y/Z) NO: Invalid
Positive ToolMeas. Travel -99999~99999
N10050 9999 Restart 3.9.1
limits (X/Y/Z, or X/Y/Z1/Z2) (mm)
Negative ToolMeas. Travel -99999~99999
N10060 -9999 Restart 3.9.1
limits (X/Y/Z, or X/Y/Z1/Z2) (mm)
Enable ToolMeas. Travel YES: Valid;
N10080 NO Restart 3.9.1
limits NO: Invalid
1.1 Encoders
1: Increasing
encoder value;
N11110 Axis Encoder Dir 1 Restart 3.3.3
-1: Decreasing
encoder value
YES: Valid;
N11130 Check Encoder Error YES Restart 3.3.3
NO: Invalid
N11140 Static Tolerance 1~999999 500 Restart 3.3.3
N11150 Dynamic Tolerance 1~999999 500 Restart 3.3.3
Frequency Division Pulses
N11160 1~999999 10000 Restart 3.3.3
of PG (X4)
Delay for Stopping On
0.001~10 (s) 1 Immediate -
N11303 Estop
The time for a machine stops completely after E-stop.
YES: Valid;
N11304 Encoder Feedback YES Restart 3.3.3
NO: Invalid
N11309 Delay in Setting REF Sign 0.5~5 0.5 Immediate -

Table of Parameters「205」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
The wait time for a machine tool stopping completely after backing to machine origin
completed. The REF. Point mark will not be set until after the wait time.
1.2 Compensation
N12000 Screw Error Comp 0, 1, 2 1 Restart 3.14.1
Enable Backlash YES: Valid;
N12001 YES Restart 3.14.1
Compensation NO: Invalid
N12010 Backlash 0~1000 0 Restart 3.14.1
Turn On AQE YES: Valid;
N12020 NO Immediate 3.14.2
Compensation NO: Invalid
N12100 Time 0~10(sec) 0 Immediate 3.14.2
Distance of compensation 0~10(mm) 0 Immediate 3.14.2
N12101 N (12101+10*n) is a group of 12 parameters with same setting. In the expression
N(12101+10*n), ―n‖ can be any number among 0, 1, 2„11.
Delay 0~10(sec) 0 Immediate 3.14.2
N12102 N (12102+10*n) is a group of 12 parameters with same setting. In the expression
N(12102+10*n), ―n‖ can be any number among 0, 1, 2„11.
Intensity 0~1 0.75 Immediate 3.14.2
N12103 N (12103+10*n) is a group of 12 parameters with same setting. In the expression
N(12103+10*n), ―n‖ can be any number among 0, 1, 2„11.
1.3 Velo/Acc limits
0.001~100000
N13000 Max. Axis F(X/Y/Z) 48000 Immediate 3.12.1
(mm/min)
2.0 Spindle
N20001 Max. S 0~999999 (rpm) 24000 Restart 3.8
0~the maximal
N20002 S 12000 Immediate 3.8
speed of spindle
Spindle Cool Off Delay
N20005 0~600 (sec) 5 Immediate 3.8
Time
Spindle Speed when
N20006 0~100000(rpm) 500 Immediate 3.8
Centering
N20010 Spindle On Delay Time 0~60(sec) 5 Immediate 3.8
N20011 Spindle Off Delay Time 0~60(sec) 5 Immediate 3.8
4.1 Lubricate
YES: Auto on;
Auto Lubricate NO Immediate -
NO: Not auto on
N41000
It sets whether the system automatically opens lubrication pump periodically and fills
lube.

「206」Table of Parameters
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
Lubricating Interval 1~1000000(sec) 18000 Immediate -
N41001
It is the time interval between two start-ups of lubrication pump.
Lubricating Duration 1~100 (sec) 5 Immediate -
N41002 It is the filling time of lubrication pump each time. Default value is 5s in integral software
while 10s in multi-Z software.
4.2
Inform Type when Cycle
0; 1; 2 2 Immediate -
End
N42000
0: Red light not on; 1: Red light on for about 3s; 2: Red light always on until there is any
input from mouse or keypad.
N42001 Enable G28 YES; NO YES Immediate -
Access Check for
N42002 YES; NO NO Immediate -
Modification
Machining Range Display
N42004 0; 1 0 Immediate -
Type
4.3 Coolant
Coolant On when Task
N43001 YES; NO NO Immediate -
Start
N43002 Coolant Off when Task End YES; NO YES Immediate -
5.0 Controller
No:
Enable connection with Extended TB
N50011
extended terminal board 1;
～ Yes; No Restart -
(Extended terminal Yes:
N50017
board 1~7) Extended TB
2~7
5.2 Handwheel
YES: Adopt;
N52001 Precise Pulse Counting NO Restart 3.17.2
NO: Not adopt
Handwheel Direction 1; -1 1 Restart 3.17.2
N52002 1: Maintain the original motion direction of a machine tool in handwheel turning
-1: Reverse the original motion direction of a machine tool in handwheel turning
N52003 Multiple At X1 0.001~10 (mm) 0.001 Restart 3.17.2

N52004 Multiple At X10 0.001~10 (mm) 0.01 Restart 3.17.2

N52005 Multiple At X100 0.001~10 (mm) 0.1 Restart 3.17.2

HW Lead Gear
N52006 1~1000 1 Restart 3.17.2
(Numerator)

Table of Parameters「207」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
HW Lead Gear
N52007 1~1000 1 Restart 3.17.2
(Denominator)
N52010 Handwheel Acceleration 1~1000 (mm/s2) 200 Restart 3.17.2
Deceleration when
N52012 YES; NO YES Restart 3.17.1
Switching Axis
YES: Ais stops
when HW is turning
reversele in HW
N52013 Forbid HW Reverse Guide Guide; NO Restart 3.17.2
NO:Axis moves
normally when HW
is turning reversely.
0: To terminal
board
N52030 HW Connection Mode 1 Restart 3.17.1
1: To operation
panel
6.2 G code options
N62000 Deceleration Distance 0~999 (mm) 2 Immediate 3.16.2
0.001~99999
N62001 Approach F 300 Immediate 3.16.2
(mm/min)
Enable Arc IJK YES: Valid;
N62020 YES Immediate 3.16.2
Programming NO: Invalid
N62021 Arc Radius Tolerance 0~9999 (mm) 1 Immediate 3.16.2
Enable Tool Selection by Reload
N62022 YES; NO NO -
G-code File program
YES: Valid;
N62410 Enable Tool Compensation NO Immediate 3.14.1
NO: Invalid
1: Normal type;
N62411 Tool Compensation Type 2: Intersect type; 1 Immediate 3.14.1
3: Insert type
0: Null;
Tool Compensation
N62412 1: Left; 1 Immediate 3.14.1
Direction
2: Right
Interferometry Path
N62413 1~5 3 Immediate 3.14.1
Segments
Enable Evade YES: enable
N62414 NO Immediate 3.14.1
Interferometry NO: disable
-99999~99999
N62730 G73_G83 Lifting Distance 0 Immediate 3.16.2
(mm)

「208」Table of Parameters
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
0: G17 +X; 1: G17
–X;
N62760 G76_G87 Stop Orientation 0 Immediate 3.16.2
2: G17 +Y; 3: G17
-Y
6.3 Trajectory
Look Ahead Distance for
N63000 0~999 0.5 Immediate -
Interpolation
N63002 Delay for Exact Stop 0~999 (s) 0 Immediate 3.12.1
N63006 Path Smoothing Time 0~0.064 (s) 0 Immediate 3.12.1
6.4 Velocity/Acc
N64000 Startup F 0~600(mm/min) 0 Immediate 3.12.4
Feed rate~Maximal
speed of each axis
N64020 G00 F /Maximal G00 3000 Immediate 3.12.4
speed supported
by hardware
0~Rapid travel rate
/ Maximal G00
speed supported
N64040 F 1200 Immediate 3.12.4
by
hardware/Maximal
feed rate
0~100000
N64060 Max. F 48000 Immediate 3.12.4
(mm/min)
Rapid Motion Axial 0.001~100000
N64101 800 Immediate 3.12.4
Acceleration (mm/s2)
0.001~100000
N64102 Z-axis Acceleration 800 Immediate 3.12.4
(mm/s2)
0.001~100000
N64120 Acceleration for Corners 3800 Immediate 3.12.4
(mm/s2)
0.001~1e+011
N64150 Axial Jerk 150000 Immediate 3.12.4
(mm/s3)
Smoothing The Path YES: Enabled;
N64200 YES Immediate 3.12.4
Velocity NO: Disabled
MAX Angle Smooth
0~180 90 Immediate 3.12.4
Velocity
N64201
When the connection angle of two segments is larger than the value of the parameter, the
system will start at startup speed, instead of smoothing the path velocity.

Table of Parameters「209」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
Path Interpolation
1; 2; 3 3 Immediate 3.12.4
Algorithm
N64203
Its setting range: 0: trapezoid algorithm 1: S-type algorithm 2: LEP algorithm 3:
acceleration trapezoid algorithm.
Acc or Dec time after
0~99999 0.005 Immediate -
Interpolation
N64204
The longer the time is, the smoother the velocity will be. This parameter has no effect on
the track precision.
N64205 Min. F of LEP Interpolation 0~100000 60 Immediate 3.12.4
YES: Enabled
N64207 Arc Velocity Limit YES Immediate 3.12.4
NO: Disabled
0.001~100000
N64208 Max. F of Reference Circle 3600 Immediate 3.12.4
(mm/min)
0.001~100000
N64209 Min. F of Arc 180 Immediate 3.12.4
(mm/min)
N64245 Pretreatment Path Number 1~2000 300 Immediate 3.12.4
Velocity Smooth for Single YES: enable
N64249 YES Restart -
Axis NO: disable
6.5 File translation
PLT file translation
Reload
N65000 Retract (PLT) 0~99999 (mm) 5 3.16.4
program
Reload
N65001 PLT Units 0.001~99999 40 3.16.4
program
0.0001~99999 Reload
N65002 Tool Offset 0.025 3.16.4
(mm) program
Reload
N65003 Cutting Depth -99999~0 (mm) 0 3.16.4
program
DXF file translation
Reload
N65100 Retract (DXF) 0~99999 (mm) 5 3.16.4
program
Reload
N65101 Cutting Depth -99999~0 (mm) 0 3.16.4
program
Reload
N65102 Layer Depth -99999~0 (mm) 0 3.16.4
program
YES: Use; Reload
N65103 First Point As Origin YES 3.16.4
NO: Not use program
YES: Valid; Reload
N65104 By Contour NO 3.16.4
NO: Invalid program

「210」Table of Parameters
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
YES: Valid; Reload
N65105 Enable Bottom Cutting NO 3.16.4
NO: Invalid program
YES: Forcibly use;
Reload
N65106 Use Metric NO: Not forcibly NO 3.16.4
program
use
ENG file translation
Reload
N65200 Retract (ENG) 0~99999 (mm) 5 3.16.4
program
Reload
N65201 Prompt For Tool Change YES ; NO YES 3.16.4
program
YES: Use; Reload
N65203 Cutting By Tool No. NO 3.16.4
NO: Not use; program
0: Reciprocating
chip removal
Reload
N65204 Deep Hole Cutting Type 1: High-speed 0 3.16.4
program
reciprocating chip
removal
Reload
N65205 Lifting Distance 0~99999 1 3.16.4
program
YES: Forcibly use;
Force To Use Tool Reload
N65206 NO: Not forcibly YES 3.14.1
Compensation program
use
Modify Tool No. in ENG YES: Enabled Reload
N65207 NO 3.14.1
File NO: Disabled program
Reload
Z-axis Plunge Type 0; 1 1 3.14.1
program
N65208
The type of Z-axis downward feed at the beginning of machining an ENG file:
0: From safe height; 1: From the highest point (N10030 Table Travel Upper Limit -1)
YES: Enabled Reload
N65209 Lift when Change Tool YES 3.14.1
NO: Disabled program
Ignore Coordination YES: Enabled
N65210 NO Immediate 3.10.1
System Instruction NO: Disabled
Z Lift Type after Drilling 0; 1 1 Immediate -
N65211 0: To R Plane
1: To specified position, exclusively of ENG file.
Z Position after Drilling -1000~1000mm 10 Immediate -
N65212
Lift Z-axis to this position when ―Z Lift Type after Drilling‖ is set as 1.

Table of Parameters「211」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
0: Feedrate in
machining Reload
N65213 Z Plunge Feedrate 0 -
1: Feedrate in rapid program
traversing
6.6 Change tool (Parameter No. may vary in multi-Z software and integral software, please note
that.)
-99999~99999
N66005 Upper Position 0 Immediate 3.20.3
(mm)
-99999~100000
N66006 Lower Position 0 Immediate 3.20.3
(mm)
Spindle Position in Tool -99999~99999
N66007 9999 Immediate 3.20.3
Change X (mm)
Spindle Position in Tool -99999~100000
N66008 9999 Immediate 3.20.3
Change Y (mm)
-99999~100000
N66017 Deceleration Position X 0 Immediate 3.20.3
(mm)
-99999~100000
N66018 Deceleration Position Y 0 Immediate 3.20.3
(mm)
0~100000
N66028 F in Tool Changing 3000 Immediate 3.20.3
(mm/min)
F in Moving from Upper
N66029 0~60000(mm/min) 1800 Immediate 3.20.3
Position to Lower Position
YES: enable
Automatic tool
measure
N66030 Automatic Tool Measure YES Immediate 3.20.3
NO: disable
Automatic tool
measure
0: Null
1: Disk Tool
N66031 Tool Magazine Type Magazine 0 Restart 3.20.3
2: Linear Tool
Magazine
N66032 Tool Magazine Capacity 1~255 8 Immediate 3.20.3
N66036 Tool Count Port - NA Immediate -
Tool Mag. Back to Origin
N66037 - NA Immediate 4.3
Port
N66038 Tool Mag. CW port - NA Immediate -
N66039 Tool Mag. CCW port - NA Immediate -
N66040 Tool Count CW Delay 0~5000 0 Immediate -

「212」Table of Parameters
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
N66041 Tool Count CCW Delay 0~5000 0 Immediate -
N66042 Mag. CW to Origin Delay 0~5000 0 Immediate -
N66043 Mag. CCW to Origin Delay 0~5000 0 Immediate -
Tool Unclamp Position
N66045 - NA Immediate -
Signal Port
Tool Clamp Position Signal
N66046 - NA Immediate -
Port
External Tool Control
N66047 - NA Restart -
Signal Port
Output Port of Tool
N66048 - NA Restart -
Unclamp/Clamp
N66049 Output Port of Mag. Out - NA Restart -
Tool 1 Coordinate X (there
N66064 (mm) 0 Immediate 3.9
are 21 tools in total.)
Tool 1 Coordinate Y (there
N66065 (mm) 0 Immediate 3.9
are 21 tools in total)
6.7
N67000
Negative Change Tool
～ (mm) -10000 Restart 3.20.3
Travel Limits(X/Y/Z)
N67002
N67010
Positive Change Tool
～ (mm) 10000 Restart 3.20.3
Travel Limits(X/Y/Z)
N67012
Enable Change Tool Travel YES: Check;
N67020 NO Restart -
Limits(MCS) NO: Not check
7.1 Manu
0~N71001
N71000 Jog F 1200 Immediate 3.12.3
(mm/min)
0~N13000
N71001 Rapid Jog F 3000 Immediate 3.12.3
(mm/min)
Jog Max. F Before 0 ~ ―Rapid Jog
N71002 1200 Immediate 3.12.3
Returning to REF Point Speed‖
7.2 Auto
YES: Ignore
N72001 Ignore Prog. F No Immediate 3.12.4
NO: Not ignore
YES: Ignore
N72002 Ignore Prog. S No Immediate -
NO: Not ignore
YES: Fix
N72003 G00 F Fixed No Immediate 3.12.4
NO: Not fix

Table of Parameters「213」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
Spindle Off when Cycle YES: On;
N72004 YES Immediate -
Stop NO: Off
Spindle On when Cycle YES: On;
N72008 YES Immediate -
Start NO: Off
N72009 Cycle Machining Interval 0~1000 10 Immediate 3.16.2
Enable Work Coordinate YES: Enable;
N72010 NO Immediate 3.10.1
Limits NO: Disable
Negative Work Coordinate
N72020 (mm) -99999 Immediate 3.10.1
Limits
Positive Work Coordinate
N72030 (mm) 99999 Immediate 3.10.1
Limits
7.3 Pause
F When Cycle Resume 0~100000
N73000 600 Immediate -
after Pause (mm/min)
0~100000
N73001 Lifting F on Pause 600 Immediate -
(mm/min)
Z-axis Lifting Pos in WCS 0; 1; 2; 3 0 Immediate -
N73002 0: lift to distance set in parameter; 1: lift to work coordinate set in parameter; 2: lift to
Mach Coordinate set in parameter; 3: lift to fixed position set in parameter.
N73003 Z-axis Lifting Pos in WCS 0~9999 (mm) 10 Immediate -
N73004 Lifting Distance on Pause 0~500 (mm) 10 Immediate -
YES: Stop;
N73005 Stop Spindle On Pause YES Immediate -
NO: Not stop
N73006 Z-axis Lifting Pos in MCS -100~0 (mm) 0 Immediate -
7.4 Return Machine Home
YES: Required;
N74001 Back to REF Required YES Immediate 3.5.4
NO: Not required
N74010 Machine Zero Position 0~N10030 (mm) 0 Restart 3.5.4
1: Positive direction
X:-1 Y:-1
N74020 Coarse Positioning Dir. -1: Negative Immediate 3.5.4
Z:1
direction
0.001~10000
N74030 F in Coarse Positioning 1800 Immediate 3.5.4
(mm/min)
X: 00117
Coarse Positioning Switch
- Y: 00120 Immediate 3.5.4
N74040 Inport Addr.
Z: 00123
The input port of PLC address of coarse positioning switch of each axis.
1: Positive direction X: 1
Fine Positioning Dir.
N74050 -1: Negative Y: 1 Immediate 3.5.4
(X/Y/Z)
direction Z: -1

「214」Table of Parameters
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
0.001~10000
N74060 F in Fine Positioning 60 Immediate 3.5.4
(mm/min)
X: 00000
Fine Positioning Switch
- Y: 00001 Immediate -
N74070 Inport Addr.
Z:00002
The input port PLC address of accurate positioning switch of each axis.
N74080 Back Off Distance (X/Y/Z) -1000~1000 (mm) 2 Immediate 3.5.4
N74090 Home Latch Count 1~100 1 Immediate 3.5.4
N74100 Lead Screw Pitch 0~100 (mm) 5 Immediate 3.5.4
Min Distance of 0~screw pitch/2
N74110 1 Immediate 3.5.4
Coarse/Fine Switches (mm)
Coarse/Fine Pos Distance
N74120 0~100 (%) 10 Immediate 3.5.4
Tolerance
7.5 Tool Measurement (Parameter No. of following parameters may vary in multi-Z software and
integral software, please note that.)
Presetter Input Port Addr 00016 00016 Immediate -
N75000
The PLC address of the input port Tool Presetter Signal.
N75001 F in Precise Probing (mm/min) 60 Immediate 3.9
N75002 Precise Probing Duration 1~99999 1 Immediate 3.9

N75020 ToolMea Result Tolerance 0~10 0.1 Immediate 3.9

ToolMea Overtravel Port
00124 00124 Restart -
Addr
N75024
The PLC address of input on I/O board, which system gets overtravel signal from the
presetter.
NO: Invalid
N75025 ToolMea Overtravel Alarm YES Immediate 3.9
YES: Valid
N75100 Mobile Presetter Thickness -1000~1000 (mm) 0 Immediate -
N75203 F in Fixed Calibration (mm/min) 300 Immediate -
Fixed Presetter Position
N75210 -99999~99999 0 Immediate -
(X/Y/Z)
7.9 Operation others
F Mode of Z Down Infeed 0; 1; 2 0 Immediate -
0: Free mode; 1: Limit the federate to ―F of Z Down Infeed‖ when machine moves only in
N79000
Z direction;
2: Limit the federate to ―F of Z Down Infeed‖ when motion in Z direction is included.
0~100000
N79001 F of Z Down Infeed 480 Immediate -
(mm/min)
N79003 Safe Height 0~1000 (mm) 10 Immediate -
Stop Mode when Cycle 0: Stay where it is;
N79100 0 Immediate -
Completed 1: Tool moves to

Table of Parameters「215」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
fixed point; 2: Tool
moves to zero in
WCS; 3: Return
machine home.
Run T and M3, M4, M5
YES; NO NO Immediate -
Code Before Resume
N79101
Whether system run T code and M3, M4, M5 (Spindle On/Off code) when Break-Point
Resume or Advance Start.
-99999~99999
N79110 Fixed Point Position 0 Immediate -
(mm)
8.0 User interface
Support Part YES: Support;
N80002 NO Restart -
Compensation NO: Not support
0: Mobile
calibration;
N80005 Calibration Type 1: Fixed calibration; 0 Immediate 3.9.1
2: First/Exchanged
calibration
Support Part YES: Support;
N80010 NO Restart 3.10.2
Compensation NO: Not support
Show Remaining Time YES; NO YES Immediate -
N80018
Whether to show the remaining time in Controller Information Page.
Popup Right Ribbon YES; NO YES Restart -
N80020
Whether to pop up the right ribbon when switching page group.
0: Arranged by the
PLC address;
N80021 Port Arrangement 1: Ports of the 1 Restart -
terminal board
arranged first.
Print Info YES; NO YES Immediate -
N80050 It will show debug information about the process of the returning to the REF (only used
for machine with encoder at present).
YES: Use;
N80090 Use New Frp Algorithm NO Immediate -
NO: not use
N80111 Auto Restart after Register YES; NO YES Immediate -
8.1 Position view
YES: Load
automatically;
N81000 Auto Load Graph NO Immediate -
NO: Not load
automatically

「216」Table of Parameters
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
N81001 Max File Size (KB) 1000 Immediate -

N81010 Gradient Fill YES, NO YES Immediate -

N81011 Draw Workbench YES, NO NO Immediate -

N81012 Draw Grid YES, NO NO Immediate -

N81015 Clear On Loading YES, NO YES Immediate -

N81016 Draw WC Origin YES, NO NO Immediate -

N81017 Draw MC Origin YES, NO NO Immediate -

N81018 Bkground Color 1 Select a color 0×00000000 Immediate -

N81019 Bkground Color 2 Select a color 0×00000000 Immediate -

N81020 G00 Color (running) Select a color 0×0000FFFF Immediate -

N81021 G01 Color (running) Select a color 0×00FFFF00 Immediate -

N81022 G02 Color (running) Select a color 0×00FFFF00 Immediate -

N81023 G03 Color (running) Select a color 0×00FFFF00 Immediate -

N81032 G00 Color (loading) Select a color 0×04000000 Immediate -

N81033 G01 Color (loading) Select a color 0×00600000 Immediate -

N81034 G02 Color (loading) Select a color 0×00600000 Immediate -

N81035 G03 Color (loading) Select a color 0×00600000 Immediate -

N81045 Grid Color Select a color 0×00800080 Immediate -

N81046 Coordinate Color Select a color 0×0000FF00 Immediate -

N81049 WC Origin Color Select a color 0×0000FFFF Immediate -

N81050 MC Origin Color Select a color 0×0000FFFF Immediate -

The parameters above are shared in integral software and multi-Z axes software. Please note that the NO.
and default values of some parameters are not consistent in the two version software.
0: Incremental
Encoder type encoder; 1: 0 Restart -
N11001 Absolute encoder
Note: when absolute type encoder is chosen, LD5E controller should be together used;
otherwise, it cannot work normally.
Yes: Adjust
Adjust position at E-stop Yes Restart -
No: Not to adjust
When encoder feedback function is enabled, whether to adjust position after E-stop is
N11190
canceled. Note that this function is only effective in situation where incremental type
encoder is adopted. When absolute encoder is adopted, position adjustment is enabled
anytime.

Table of Parameters「217」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
Motor rotate type (X/Y/Z) 1;-1 -1 Restart -
N11200 1: taking CW as the positive direction; -1: taking CCW as the positive direction. Note that
the parameter is in need of setting only when absolute encoder is adopted.
0.001~tolerance
N11306 Double Y Static Tolerance 5 Restart -
limit
Double Y Dynamic 0.001~tolerance
N11307 5 Restart -
Tolerance limit
N11308 Double Y Adjust Range 0.001~100 10 Immediate
N14004 Rotary axis acceleration 0.001~1e+011 500 Restart
Effective Radius of Rotary
N15030 1.0~9999.0 57.296 Restart
axis
Look Ahead Distance for
N63001 0~0.05 0 Immediate -
Velocity
Max Look Ahead Path
N63003 1~1000 100 Immediate -
Segments in LEP
0: Null;
N63007 Path Pretreatment Options 1: Tolerance; 0 Immediate -
2: Smoothing
Path Pretreatment
N63008 0~0.1 0 Immediate -
Precision
Path Pretreatment Max
N63009 0~180(degree) 180 Immediate -
Angle
YES: Enable;
Rotate Axis by Sign NO Immediate -
NO: Disable
N63020
In absolute dimension, rotatory axis direction is decided by sign ―+‖"-" in code. Please
confirm the current file if you change this parameter.
0.001~100000
N64103 Speed Up Acceleration 800 Immediate -
(mm/s2)
0.001~100000
N64104 Speed Down Deceleration 800 Immediate -
(mm/s2)
Decelerate at Max Connect YES: Enable;
N64241 YES Immediate -
Angle NO: Disable
Enable non-linear Yes: Enable;
N64242 NO Immediate -
interpolation compensation No: Disable
Mechanical structure of
0；1 0 Immediate -
machine with 4 axes
N64243 It refers to four axes machine mechanical structure, which is used for non-linear
interpolation compensation. 0: rotary axis is parallel to X-axis; 1: rotary axis is parallel to
Y-axis.

「218」Table of Parameters
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
Smooth Speed for Short YES: Enable;
N64246 NO Immediate 3.12.4
Lines NO: Disable
Reference Length of Short
N64247 0.001~10 1 Immediate -
Lines
Enable Length of Short YES: Enable;
N64248 NO Immediate -
Lines NO: Disable
YES: Enable;
N66000 Prompt For Tool Change NO Immediate -
NO: Disable
Pause in Tool Change for
YES: Pause;
N66002 Same Active and Target NO Immediate -
NO: Not pause.
Tool No.
Check ToolNo YES; NO YES Immediate -
N66033 YES: Limit the target tool number within (0, 255); NO: No limit and keep tool number
unchanged.
Return to Fixed Point On
N73007 -99999~99999 0 Immediate -
Pause
7.8 Preheat And Wear
Warm-up and trial-run YES: Open
N78000 NO Immediate 3.7
switch NO: Close
YES: Open
N78001 Warm-up switch YES Immediate 3.7
NO: Close
YES: Open
N78002 Trial-run switch YES Immediate 3.7
NO: Close
Coolant On during warming YES: Turn on
N78100 YES Immediate 3.7
up NO: Turn off
0~the maximal
N78110 Warm-up startup speed warm-up startup 0 Immediate 3.7
speed
N78111 Warm-up max.speed 0~24000 0 Immediate 3.7
N78112 Spindle speed increment 0~24000 0 Immediate 3.7
Spindle speed increase
N78113 1~60 1 Immediate 3.7
interval.
Lubrication On during trial YES: Turn on
N78200 NO Immediate 3.7
run. NO: Turn off
N78210
X/Y: 100
~ Trial-run end (X/Y/Z) -99999~100000 Immediate 3.7
Z: -20
N72812
N78220 Trial-run times 1~1000 1 Immediate 3.7
N78221 Trial-run speed 0~100000 1500 Immediate
Please note that the parameters above are unique in integral software.

Table of Parameters「219」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
Lube pump detection start
N41006 - 0 Immediate -
time
Lube pump detection end
N41007 - - Immediate -
time
N41010 Auto Draining YES; NO NO Immediate -
N41011 Auto Draining Interval 3.6~3600000 1800 Immediate -
N41012 Auto Draining Duration 1~100 10 Immediate -
N62090 Exact Stop Tolerance 0~99 0.001 Immediate -
Look Ahead Distance for
N63001 0~0.1 0 Immediate -
Velocity
N64100 Axial Acceleration 0.001~100000 800 Immediate -
N64244 Optimize Performance YES; NO YES Immediate -
Change tool overtravel
N67003 (mm) -10000 Restart -
limit-Negative Z2
Change tool overtravel
N67013 (mm) 10000 Restart -
limit-Positive Z2
Yes: Cancel
Cancel REF. at reset Yes Immediate -
No: Not cancel
N74000
Once reset operation is enabled during machining, sign of returned machine origin will be
cleared.
Yes: Cancel
Cancel REF. sign at E-stop Yes Immediate -
No: Not cancel
N74002
With encoder feedback function is enabled, sign of returned machine origin will not be
cleared at emergency stop occurrence if the parameter is set to ―No‖.
0: With multiple
presetters, all Z
axes are calibrated
at the same time;
N75026 Calibration Procedure 1 Restart -
1: With only one
presetter for all Z
axes, calibrate in
turn.
N75400 Auto Leveling Z Axes YES; NO YES Immediate -
Z1 Pos when Change
N79401 -100~0mm 0 Immediate -
Spindle
Z2 Pos when Change
N79402 -100~0mm 0 Immediate -
Spindle
Switch to Z1-axis when
N79403 -100~0mm NO Immediate -
task ends
N79404 Z1Z2 Spacing Offset X -9999~9999mm 0 Restart -

「220」Table of Parameters
Specialized Concentrated Focused

Para. Refer-
Name Setting Range Default Effective
No. ence
N79405 Z1Z2 Spacing Offset Y -9999~9999mm 0 Restart -
Please note that the parameters above are unique in multi-Z axes software.

Table of Parameters「221」
Specialized Concentrated Focused

8 Software License Agreement

Important—Read Carefully before Using This Product:

The term ―Software Product‖ includes all copies of the licensed software and its documentation. This
license agreement is a legal agreement between You (either an individual, a legal entity or any affiliated
companies or other entities) and Weihong Electronic Technology Co., Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as
Weihong Company). By installing, copying, or otherwise using the Software Product, you agree to be
bound by the terms and conditions of this license. Unless otherwise stated in this agreement, you shall
not use, copy, revise, rent, or transfer the Software product or any part of the Software Product for any
other purposes.

Description of Further Rights and Restrictions:

1. You may install for use one copy of the Software Product on a single machine;
2. You may make a copy of the Software Product for archive or backup purposes and the copy is to be
used on this machine only;
3. You may transfer the Software Product and the license agreement to a third party, provided that the
third party accepts the terms and conditions stated in this agreement, with prior express permission
from Weihong Company;
4. When transfer confirmed, you shall transfer all the copies of the original documents and the
supplementary documents to the third party or destroy all the copies un-transferred.
5. You can use the Software Product on a network server or intranet server only if it is stipulated in
explicit terms that you are allowed to use the Software Product on a network server or intranet
server, or you have purchased license for each node and terminal using the Software Product;
6. You may NOT sublicense, assign or transfer the license agreement;
7. You may NOT or direct any third party to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the Software
Product;
8. You may NOT copy or transfer the Software Product or any part of the Software Product unless
otherwise expressly stated in this agreement;
9. The license agreement shall be terminated automatically upon you transfer the Software Product or
copies of all or part of the Software Product to a third party.

Intellectual Property Rights Notice:

The Software Product and all intellectual property rights therein (including but not limited to any all
copyrights, patents, trademarks, and publicity rights) are owned by Weihong Company. The Software
Product is protected for Weihong Company on the basis of copyright law and international treaty
provisions as well as on the basis of other laws and agreements regarding intellectual property. You are
not allowed to remove the copyright statement made in the Software Product, and guarantee that you
shall copy the copyright statement in all copies of the Software Product or of any part of the Software
Product. You are obliged to stop any form of illegal copying of the Software Product and accompanying

「222」Software License Agreement

Specialized Concentrated Focused

materials.

After-sales Guarantee:

Weihong Company guarantees that for 90 days from the date of shipment the software carrier will be
free from defects in materials and workmanship. When such a defect has been confirmed, our only
responsibility is to replace the software carrier. This remedy is your exclusive remedy. This after-sales
guarantee is invalid for any carrier defect caused by accidents, abuses or maloperation. The replaced
software carrier enjoys the remaining guarantee time of the original software carrier or of a 30-day
guarantee time, whichever is longer.
Except as the after-sales guarantee made above, the Software Product does not enjoy any other form of
after-sale guarantee.

Limitation of Liability:

The above guarantee, whether made explicitly or by implication, constitutes the entire contents of the
guarantee, including guarantee for the commerciality and applicability of special application aim.
Whether you follow other terms in this agreement or not, Weihong Company, as well as its agents and
sales staff, will not be responsible for any profits loss, availability loss, business break-off or any forms of
indirect, special, accidental or inevitable damage or claim made by any third party, generated from the
using of the Software Product, even if Weihong Company has been informed of the possible occurrence
of such events in advance.

Termination:

This license may be terminated by Weihong Company at any time once you violate any terms or
conditions made in this agreement. Once the license is terminated, you are obliged to destroy all the
copies of the Software Product or return them to Weihong Company.

Applicable Law:

Now, we affirm that you have already read through this agreement and understood it thoroughly and
agreed to comply with all of the terms and conditions of this agreement strictly.

Weihong Electronic Technology Co., Ltd.

Software License Agreement「229」

User Manual - SZGH-CNC1000TDb (V4.0) - VIP
No ratings yet
User Manual - SZGH-CNC1000TDb (V4.0) - VIP
215 pages
Okuma CNC Systems OSP U100L OSP U10L Operation Manual
100% (1)
Okuma CNC Systems OSP U100L OSP U10L Operation Manual
409 pages
Fanuc Series 0T Operator S Manual
100% (5)
Fanuc Series 0T Operator S Manual
680 pages
BodorPro2.0.0Laser Cutting CNC System Users
100% (1)
BodorPro2.0.0Laser Cutting CNC System Users
150 pages
Fanuc 30i 31i 32i Model B Descriptions Manual
100% (1)
Fanuc 30i 31i 32i Model B Descriptions Manual
526 pages
B-64487EN - 05 Operation and Maintenance Handbook 30i
No ratings yet
B-64487EN - 05 Operation and Maintenance Handbook 30i
974 pages
FANUC 16 18 C Operation Maintenance Handbook
No ratings yet
FANUC 16 18 C Operation Maintenance Handbook
456 pages
NK280 Integrated CNC System Manufacturers'Manual-R2
No ratings yet
NK280 Integrated CNC System Manufacturers'Manual-R2
158 pages
POLY GIM Swiss Type CNC Auto Lathe Diamond II&III SERIES Maintenance Manual
67% (3)
POLY GIM Swiss Type CNC Auto Lathe Diamond II&III SERIES Maintenance Manual
274 pages
M 720 BM
No ratings yet
M 720 BM
127 pages
FANUC-16,18-C Operation & Maintenance Handbook
100% (3)
FANUC-16,18-C Operation & Maintenance Handbook
456 pages
OSP Widget Manager User Manual
No ratings yet
OSP Widget Manager User Manual
27 pages
1 160Q6110P9
No ratings yet
1 160Q6110P9
217 pages
NC Studio V10 Glass Cutting V8
No ratings yet
NC Studio V10 Glass Cutting V8
99 pages
NC Editor Plasma Cutting CNC System
No ratings yet
NC Editor Plasma Cutting CNC System
143 pages
Ncstudio V10 Waterjet Cutting CNC System: Users' Manual
No ratings yet
Ncstudio V10 Waterjet Cutting CNC System: Users' Manual
104 pages
NK260 Integrated CNC System Manufacturers' Manual-R12-1-desbloqueado
100% (1)
NK260 Integrated CNC System Manufacturers' Manual-R12-1-desbloqueado
163 pages
Controlador Lambda s4 Mesa de Corte
No ratings yet
Controlador Lambda s4 Mesa de Corte
161 pages
CNC
No ratings yet
CNC
89 pages
NK105G2G3 CNC System Manufacturers' Manual-R7.3
No ratings yet
NK105G2G3 CNC System Manufacturers' Manual-R7.3
114 pages
NcStudio V8 Engraving CNC System Users' Manual-R5.1
No ratings yet
NcStudio V8 Engraving CNC System Users' Manual-R5.1
118 pages
NC Studio V-8
No ratings yet
NC Studio V-8
128 pages
User Manual of NK105 G2 Handle Controller Ricocnc
No ratings yet
User Manual of NK105 G2 Handle Controller Ricocnc
89 pages
Weihong NK260 PDF
No ratings yet
Weihong NK260 PDF
145 pages
NC Studio Controller ATC Manual
No ratings yet
NC Studio Controller ATC Manual
87 pages
EasyRoute CNC Control Panel Manufacture Manual
No ratings yet
EasyRoute CNC Control Panel Manufacture Manual
100 pages
Lambda User Manual
No ratings yet
Lambda User Manual
193 pages
Yasnac J300 Connecting Manual (Type B)
100% (1)
Yasnac J300 Connecting Manual (Type B)
186 pages
Yas j3000
No ratings yet
Yas j3000
186 pages
01programming of CNC
0% (1)
01programming of CNC
117 pages
NK 105 G2 G3 Manual-Winter
No ratings yet
NK 105 G2 G3 Manual-Winter
118 pages
01programming SZGH CNC990TDb (V2.4)
100% (2)
01programming SZGH CNC990TDb (V2.4)
120 pages
Ib 1500104 Engc
No ratings yet
Ib 1500104 Engc
181 pages
Users' Manual of Three-Axis Engraving Machine V8-R5.03
0% (1)
Users' Manual of Three-Axis Engraving Machine V8-R5.03
114 pages
70 Series Connection Manual
No ratings yet
70 Series Connection Manual
203 pages
70 Series Connection Manual
No ratings yet
70 Series Connection Manual
203 pages
01programming SZGH-CNC1000TDb (V2.2) 1564567468981
No ratings yet
01programming SZGH-CNC1000TDb (V2.2) 1564567468981
118 pages
Manual 1000MDB - TRADUZIR
No ratings yet
Manual 1000MDB - TRADUZIR
234 pages
01programming SZGH-CNC1000TDb (V2.2) 1564567468981
No ratings yet
01programming SZGH-CNC1000TDb (V2.2) 1564567468981
118 pages
Ib1500034e PDF
No ratings yet
Ib1500034e PDF
293 pages
Sie C843 13.2
No ratings yet
Sie C843 13.2
145 pages
62684en1 PDF
No ratings yet
62684en1 PDF
447 pages
en
No ratings yet
en
516 pages
CNC Description
No ratings yet
CNC Description
516 pages
nk105 Manual PDF
No ratings yet
nk105 Manual PDF
87 pages
B-64492EN - 03 - 3xiLB DESCRIPTIONS
No ratings yet
B-64492EN - 03 - 3xiLB DESCRIPTIONS
142 pages
f15 Operation Manual
No ratings yet
f15 Operation Manual
487 pages
63172en - Power Mate I D H Discripton
No ratings yet
63172en - Power Mate I D H Discripton
229 pages
B-64483EN 02 Connection Hardware
100% (1)
B-64483EN 02 Connection Hardware
608 pages
CNC Fanuc Operation Maintenance Handbook PDF
No ratings yet
CNC Fanuc Operation Maintenance Handbook PDF
456 pages
e60, e68 - руководство По Установке и Техническому Обслуживанию - eng
No ratings yet
e60, e68 - руководство По Установке и Техническому Обслуживанию - eng
162 pages
0i TF PLUS OP EN
No ratings yet
0i TF PLUS OP EN
374 pages
C1000T Turning CNC Controller User Manual
No ratings yet
C1000T Turning CNC Controller User Manual
357 pages
Programmimng Manual Nct04
No ratings yet
Programmimng Manual Nct04
85 pages
Index Drive Manual
No ratings yet
Index Drive Manual
269 pages
01programming SZGH-CNC1000MDcb (V3 2) - P
No ratings yet
01programming SZGH-CNC1000MDcb (V3 2) - P
134 pages
Correct Maintenance - Cognex DataMan 8500
From Everand
Correct Maintenance - Cognex DataMan 8500
Unique Content
No ratings yet
Thomson Electrac HD Linear Actuator Motion Control per CAN Bus
From Everand
Thomson Electrac HD Linear Actuator Motion Control per CAN Bus
Wilfried Voss
No ratings yet
Practical, Made Easy Guide To Building, Office And Home Automation Systems - Part One
From Everand
Practical, Made Easy Guide To Building, Office And Home Automation Systems - Part One
Kerwin Mathew
No ratings yet
Networked Control System: Fundamentals and Applications
From Everand
Networked Control System: Fundamentals and Applications
Fouad Sabry
No ratings yet
Guidelines For Repeated Electrical Test or Test Following Repair
No ratings yet
Guidelines For Repeated Electrical Test or Test Following Repair
12 pages
Handling and Repairing of Blade Receptacles
No ratings yet
Handling and Repairing of Blade Receptacles
4 pages
Manufacturer's Recommendation For Routine Operation of Sealing Devices
No ratings yet
Manufacturer's Recommendation For Routine Operation of Sealing Devices
2 pages
2 - Adjustment Locking Slide (From Step 9) (Art. No. BS032)
No ratings yet
2 - Adjustment Locking Slide (From Step 9) (Art. No. BS032)
8 pages
2 - Record of Installation and Setting Up - IP - Dem47 - 01047 - EN
No ratings yet
2 - Record of Installation and Setting Up - IP - Dem47 - 01047 - EN
3 pages
VacuKlav 31B+ Maintenance Instructions
No ratings yet
VacuKlav 31B+ Maintenance Instructions
13 pages
FW35
No ratings yet
FW35
8 pages
Aula 11 - Maciel
No ratings yet
Aula 11 - Maciel
52 pages
Index & Reports 2024 - July To August - Topic-Wise PDF by AffairsCloud 3
No ratings yet
Index & Reports 2024 - July To August - Topic-Wise PDF by AffairsCloud 3
20 pages
Corporate Cricket Tournament Registration Form
No ratings yet
Corporate Cricket Tournament Registration Form
3 pages
Humoral and Cell Mediated Immune Response-Final-1
No ratings yet
Humoral and Cell Mediated Immune Response-Final-1
21 pages
Gujarat Technological University Environmental Engineering
No ratings yet
Gujarat Technological University Environmental Engineering
3 pages
Purpose Responsibilities: Vendor Qualification and Monitoring
No ratings yet
Purpose Responsibilities: Vendor Qualification and Monitoring
36 pages
OleksandrHunko CV2025
No ratings yet
OleksandrHunko CV2025
1 page
TLV Check Valve Ckf3m
No ratings yet
TLV Check Valve Ckf3m
2 pages
The Advantage and Disadvantages of Using The Inquiry Model in Physics Teaching
No ratings yet
The Advantage and Disadvantages of Using The Inquiry Model in Physics Teaching
10 pages
DLL - Grades 9 Week 3 2024-25
No ratings yet
DLL - Grades 9 Week 3 2024-25
5 pages
Gujarat Technological University (Gtu) : (HTTP://WWW - Gtu.ac - In/)
No ratings yet
Gujarat Technological University (Gtu) : (HTTP://WWW - Gtu.ac - In/)
10 pages
(The English Coach) Giveaway Speaking Samples 0823
No ratings yet
(The English Coach) Giveaway Speaking Samples 0823
9 pages
Relationship Between Students Interest and School Performance
No ratings yet
Relationship Between Students Interest and School Performance
2 pages
Effect of Using Sodium Polyacrylate From Used Diapers
No ratings yet
Effect of Using Sodium Polyacrylate From Used Diapers
13 pages
Bs 6920 12014 14366
No ratings yet
Bs 6920 12014 14366
3 pages
The Industrial Development Bank of India Limited
No ratings yet
The Industrial Development Bank of India Limited
5 pages
Business Model Workbook
No ratings yet
Business Model Workbook
10 pages
63325revised Summer Internship Notice Hygienic Research Institute Pvt. Ltd. 2021
No ratings yet
63325revised Summer Internship Notice Hygienic Research Institute Pvt. Ltd. 2021
2 pages
The Perfect Heist
No ratings yet
The Perfect Heist
107 pages
Bloomberg Businessweek USA - May 06 2024
No ratings yet
Bloomberg Businessweek USA - May 06 2024
80 pages
A2 Chemistry, Unit 5 Module 3 Worksheet 6 (AQA Past Examination Questions, Unit 5.4, 5.5)
No ratings yet
A2 Chemistry, Unit 5 Module 3 Worksheet 6 (AQA Past Examination Questions, Unit 5.4, 5.5)
4 pages
Science Class 5 Pratice Question Bank 2 (Gases All Around)
No ratings yet
Science Class 5 Pratice Question Bank 2 (Gases All Around)
2 pages
3rd QUARTER ARTS
No ratings yet
3rd QUARTER ARTS
4 pages
CAP Regulation 173-3 - 05/03/2002
No ratings yet
CAP Regulation 173-3 - 05/03/2002
8 pages
Plagiarism Report KIIT
No ratings yet
Plagiarism Report KIIT
42 pages
API Account Access
No ratings yet
API Account Access
28 pages
Esr-3807 23
No ratings yet
Esr-3807 23
28 pages
Movement Disorders
No ratings yet
Movement Disorders
4 pages
S1 French Test Practice
No ratings yet
S1 French Test Practice
16 pages